Yamaha RX-V675 El manual del propietario
- Categoría
- Receptores AV
- Tipo
- El manual del propietario
Este manual también es adecuado para
English
AV Receiver
Owner’s Manual
Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit.
En 2
CONTENTS
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
FEATURES 6
What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Front panel (RX-V775) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Front panel (RX-V675) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Rear panel (RX-V775) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Rear panel (RX-V675) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
PREPARATIONS 14
General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1 Placing speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
6 Connecting to a network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
7 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Connecting an external power amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Connecting recording devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
8 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
9 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . 37
Measuring at one listening position (single measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) (RX-V775 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Checking the measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
PLAYBACK 45
Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Selecting an HDMI output jack (RX-V775 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch
(SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
En 3
Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Preparing Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Controlling Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Viewing the status information on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources
(Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
CONFIGURATIONS 81
Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders
(Sound Program menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Sound Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . . 103
Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 105
ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MON.CHK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Restoring the default settings (INIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Updating the firmware (UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Controlling external devices with the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Registering the remote control code for a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Registering the remote control codes for playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Programming from other remote controls (learning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Clearing functions learned from other remote controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Resetting remote control codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
En 4
APPENDIX 114
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Ideal speaker layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Accessories En 5
Accessories
Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.
Remote control Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)
AM antenna FM antenna
*One of the above is supplied depending on the region of
purchase.
YPAO microphone CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual)
Easy Setup Guide Safety Brochure
Insert the batteries the right
way round.
Operating range of the remote control
• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range
shown below.
• The illustrations of the main unit and remote control used in this manual are of the RX-V775 (U.S.A.
model), unless otherwise specified.
• Some features are not available in certain regions.
• Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice.
• This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.
• This manual describes all the “iPod”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to “iPod”, “iPhone”
and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified.
• indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.
• indicates supplementary explanations for better use.
30° 30°
Within
6 m (20 ft)
(RX-V775) (RX-V675)
30° 30°
FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 6
FEATURES
What you can do with the unit
AV receiver (the unit)
Speakers
BD/DVD player
HDMI Control
Audio/Video
TV remote control
Audio
HDMI Control
Audio
Audio/Video
TV
Sequential operation of a TV,
AV receiver, and BD/DVD
player (HDMI Control)
. p.127
Change the input source
and favorite settings with
one touch (SCENE)
. p.46
Supports 2- to 7.1-channel (plus presence)
speaker system. Allows you to enjoy your favorite
acoustic spaces in various styles.
• Automatically optimizing the speaker
settings to suit your room (YPAO)
. p.37
• Reproducing stereo or multichannel
sounds with the sound fields like
actual movie theaters and concert halls
(CINEMA DSP)
. p.48
• Enjoying compressed music with
enhanced sound (Compressed Music
Enhancer)
. p.52
• Playing back music in multiple rooms
(multi-zone)
. p.72
iPod/iPhone/iPad
USB device
Audio
Network contents
Wide variety of supported content
• iPod/iPhone/iPad
. p.58
•USB
. p.62
• Media server (PC/NAS)
. p.65
• Internet radio
. p.68
•AirPlay
. p.70
3D and 4K signals supported
Audio/Video
(via HDMI/MHL)
Smartphone/Tablet
Control
Control
FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 7
Full of useful functions!
❑ Connecting various devices (p.28)
A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks
on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as
BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players),
game consoles, camcorders, and other devices.
❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound
with a single HDMI cable connection
(Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.23)
When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one
HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio
input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control
signals.
❑ Easy operation and wireless music
playback from iPhone or Android device
By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV
CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an
iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices. Visit our
website for details.
❑ Creating 3-dimensional sound fields (p.48)
Connecting presence speakers allows you to create a
natural 3-dimensional sound field in your own room
(CINEMA DSP 3D). Even when no presence speakers
are connected, the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)
function produces 3D surround sound.
❑ Listening to FM/AM radio (p.53)
The unit is equipped with a built-in FM/AM tuner. You
can register up to 40 favorite radio stations as presets.
❑ Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (p.52)
When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays
back the selected source with the least circuitry, which
lets you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.
❑ Easy operation with a TV screen
You can navigate through different types of content
(such as iPod, USB, and network), view information, or
easily configure the settings using the on-screen menu.
❑ Low power consumption
The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the
unit’s power consumption (p.102).
BD/DVD
player
Game
console
Camcorder
TV
Set-top box
HDMI Control
TV audio
Video from
external device
Useful tips
The combination of video/audio input jacks does not
match an external device...
Use “Audio In” in the “Input” menu to change the
combination of video/audio input jacks so that it matches
the output jack(s) of your external device (p.29).
Video and audio are not synchronized...
Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay
between video and audio output (p.94).
I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...
Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the
output destination of signals input into the unit (p.97).
Your TV speakers may be selected as an output
destination.
I want to use the supplied remote control to operate
external devices…
Register the remote control codes of the external
devices (such as a TV and BD/DVD players) (p.108).
I want to change the on-screen menu language...
Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a
language from English, Japanese, French, German,
Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.36).
I want to update the firmware...
Use “UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to
update the unit’s firmware (p.107). If the unit is
connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed
on the TV when a firmware update is available (p.113).
Many other settings are available that let you to
customize the unit. For details, see the following pages.
• Input settings (p.81)
• SCENE settings (p.84)
• Sound program and surround decoder settings (p.86)
• Various function settings (p.89)
• Information view (such as audio signal and video
signal) (p.104)
• System settings (p.105)
FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 8
Front panel (RX-V775)
1 MAIN ZONE z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
2 Standby indicator
Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the
following conditions.
• HDMI Control is enabled (p.96)
• Standby Through is enabled (p.97)
• Network Standby is enabled (p.98)
• An iPod is being charged (p.58)
3 ZONE 2 key
Enables/disables the audio output to Zone2 (p.75).
4 ZONE CONTROL key
Changes the zone (main zone or the Zone2) that is controlled
by the keys and knobs on the front panel (p.75).
5 INFO key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.77).
6 MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.54).
7 PRESET keys
Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.54).
8 FM and AM keys
Switch between FM and AM (p.53).
9 Front display
Displays information (p.10).
0 Remote control sensor
Receives remote control signals (p.5).
A TUNING keys
Select the radio frequency (p.53).
B PURE DIRECT key
Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.52).
C INPUT knob
Selects an input source.
D PHONES jack
For connecting headphones.
E YPAO MIC jack
For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.37).
F TONE CONTROL key
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range
of output sounds (p.79).
G SCENE keys
Select the registered input source, sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when
it is in standby mode (p.46).
H PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.47).
I STRAIGHT key
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.51).
J VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack
For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game
console (p.31) or a smartphone (p.32).
K USB jack
For connecting a USB storage device (p.62) or an iPod
(p.58).
VIDEO jack
For inputting video when “USB” is selected as the input
source (p.58).
L VOLUME knob
Adjusts the volume.
Part names and functions
INFOZONE 2
ZONE CONTROL
MEMORY
PRESET
FM AM
TUNING
CONTROL
TV
BD
DVD
NET
RADIO
INPUT
SCENE
MAIN ZONE
PHONES
SILENT
CINEMA
STRAIGHT
VIDEO
PURE DIRECT
HDMI/
5V 2.1A
VIDEO
VOLUME
AUX
TONE
PROGRAM
YPAO MIC
MHL 5V 1A
:9 B2 34561 78 A
C
LF
EDHIJKG
FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 9
Front panel (RX-V675)
1 MAIN ZONE z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
2 Standby indicator
Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the
following conditions.
• HDMI Control is enabled (p.96)
• Standby Through is enabled (p.97)
• Network Standby is enabled (p.98)
• An iPod is being charged (p.58)
3 YPAO MIC jack
For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.37).
4 ZONE 2 key
Enables/disables the audio output to Zone2 (p.75).
5 Remote control sensor
Receives remote control signals (p.5).
6 ZONE CONTROL key
Changes the zone (main zone or the Zone2) that is controlled
by the keys and knobs on the front panel (p.75).
7 INFO key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.77).
8 MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.54).
9 PRESET keys
Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.54).
0 FM and AM keys
Switch between FM and AM (p.53).
A Front display
Displays information (p.10).
B TUNING keys
Select the radio frequency (p.53).
C PURE DIRECT key
Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.52).
D PHONES jack
For connecting headphones.
E INPUT keys
Select an input source.
F TONE CONTROL key
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range
of output sounds (p.79).
G SCENE keys
Select the registered input source, sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when
it is in standby mode (p.46).
H PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.47).
I STRAIGHT key
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.51).
J VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack
For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game
console (p.31) or a smartphone (p.32).
K USB jack
For connecting a USB storage device (p.62) or an iPod
(p.58).
VIDEO jack
For inputting video when “USB” is selected as the input
source (p.58).
L VOLUME knob
Adjusts the volume.
INFOZONE 2
ZONE CONTROL
MEMORY
PRESET
FM AM
TUNING
CONTROL
TV
BD
DVD
NET
RADIO
SCENE
MAIN ZONE
PHONES
SILENT
CINEMA
STRAIGHT
VIDEO
PURE DIRECT
VIDEO
VOLUME
AUX
TONE
PROGRAM
YPAO MIC
INPUT
HDMI/
5V 2.1A
MHL 5V 1A
5A C3 46781 2 9:
D
L
FHIJKEG
B
FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 10
Front display (indicators)
1 HDMI
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.
OUT1/OUT2 (RX-V775 only)
Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI
signal
OUT (RX-V675 only)
Lights up when HDMI signals are being output.
2 CINEMA DSP
Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.48) is working.
CINEMA DSP n
Lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D (p.48) is working.
3 ENHANCER
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.52) is
working.
4 ADAPTIVE DRC
Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.79) is working.
5 STEREO
Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.
TUNED
Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station
signal.
6 PARTY (RX-V775 only)
Lights up when the unit is in the party mode. (p.76)
7 SLEEP
Lights up when the sleep timer is on.
8 ZONE2
Lights up when audio output to Zone2 is enabled (p.75).
9 MUTE
Blinks when audio is muted.
0 Volume indicator
Indicates the current volume.
A Cursor indicators
Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.
B Information display
Displays the current status (such as input name and sound
mode name). You can switch the information by pressing
INFO (p.77).
C Speaker indicators
Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.
A Front speaker (L)
S Front speaker (R)
D Center speaker
F Surround speaker (L)
G Surround speaker (R)
H Surround back speaker (L)
J Surround back speaker (R)
K Surround back speaker
Z Presence speaker (L)
X Presence speaker (R)
L Subwoofer
SW
C
LR
PL PR
SL SR
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
ADAPTIVE DRC
STEREO
PARTY
3
2
TUNED
SLEEP
ZONE
SBL SB SBR
OUT 1 2
1 623 4 7 98:5
A AB C
FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 11
Rear panel (RX-V775)
1 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that
allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another
room (p.74).
2 TRIGGER OUT jack
For connecting to a device that supports the trigger function
(p.35).
3 DC OUT jack
For connecting to an optional accessory.
4 NETWORK jack
For connecting to a network (p.33).
5 ANTENNA jacks
For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.32).
6 HDMI OUT 1–2 jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible TVs and outputting
video/audio signals (p.23). When using ARC, TV audio signal
can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
7 MONITOR OUT jacks
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For connecting to a TV that supports component video and
outputting video signals (p.27).
VIDEO jack
For connecting to a TV that supports composite video and
outputting video signals (p.27).
8 HDMI 1–5 jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.28).
9 SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting to speakers (p.19).
0 VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(General model only)
Selects the switch position according to your local voltage
(p.35).
A Power cable
For connecting to an AC wall outlet (p.35).
B PHONO jacks
(Except for U.S.A. and Canada models)
For connecting to a turntable (p.31).
C AUDIO 1–2 jacks
For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting
audio signals (p.31).
D AV 1–6 jacks
For connecting to video/audio playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.28).
E AV OUT jacks
For outputting video/audio to a recording device (such as a
VCR) (p.34).
F ZONE2 OUT jacks
For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and
for outputting audio (p.73).
G PRE OUT jacks
For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier or to an
external power amplifier (p.34).
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
Y
P
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5
(
BD/DVD
)
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6
AV O UT
ZONE OUT
SUBWOOFER
SUR. BACKSURROUND
FRONT
PRE OUT
CENTER
SINGLE
ZONE 2
NETWORKDC OUT
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
5V
0.5A
(
NET
)
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
ZONE2/F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
COMPONENT VIDEO
CENTER
1
2
HDMI
OUT
(
RADIO
)
2
FC G
9
E
6
81 3 4
B
: A
5
D
7
* The area around the video/audio output jacks is
marked in white on the actual product to
prevent improper connections.
(U.S.A. model)
FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 12
Rear panel (RX-V675)
1 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that
allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another
room (p.74).
2 TRIGGER OUT jack
For connecting to a device that supports the trigger function
(p.35).
3 DC OUT jack
For connecting to an optional accessory.
4 NETWORK jack
For connecting to a network (p.33).
5 HDMI OUT jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting
video/audio signals (p.23). When using ARC, TV audio signal
can also be input through the HDMI OUT jack.
6 ANTENNA jacks
For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.32).
7 HDMI 1–5 jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.28).
8 SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting to speakers (p.19).
9 VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(General model only)
Selects the switch position according to your local voltage
(p.35).
0 Power cable
For connecting to an AC wall outlet (p.35).
A AUDIO 1–2 jacks
For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting
audio signals (p.31).
B AV 1–6 jacks
For connecting to video/audio playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.28).
C AV OUT jacks
For outputting video/audio to a recording device (such as a
VCR) (p.34).
D ZONE2 OUT jacks
For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and
for outputting audio (p.73).
E MONITOR OUT jacks
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For connecting to a TV that supports component video and
outputting video signals (p.27).
VIDEO jack
For connecting to a TV that supports composite video and
outputting video signals (p.27).
F SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1–2 jacks
For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.34).
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
PB
Y
P
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
PB
Y
P
R
HDMI
OUT
ARC
ANTENNA
(
RADIO
)
FM
AM
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
AV 5 AV 6
AV O UT
ZONE OUT
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
ZONE 2
NETWORKDC OUT
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
5V
0.5A
(
NET
)
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
ZONE2/F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5
(
BD/DVD
)
VIDEO
2
D FA
8
C
5
71 3 4
9 :
6
B
E
* The area around the video/audio output jacks is
marked in white on the actual product to prevent
improper connections.
(U.S.A. model)
FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 13
Remote control
1 Remote control signal transmitter
Transmits infrared signals.
2 SOURCE z key
Turns on/off an external device.
SOURCE key
Sets the remote control to operate external devices (p.109).
This key lights up in green after pressed.
RECEIVER key
Sets the remote control to operate the unit (p.109). This key
lights up in orange after pressed.
RECEIVER z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
3 Input selection keys
Select an input source for playback.
HDMI 1–5 HDMI 1–5 jacks
V-AUX VIDEO AUX jack (on the front panel)
AV 1–6 AV 1–6 jacks
AUDIO 1–2 AUDIO 1–2 jacks
TUNER FM/AM radio
USB USB jack (on the front panel)
NET NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a
desired network source)
★
(RX-V675, RX-V775 [U.S.A. and Canada models])
Changes the external device to be controlled
without switching the input source.
PHONO
(RX-V775 [except for U.S.A. and Canada models])
PHONO jacks
4 MAIN/ZONE2 switch
Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is controlled by
the remote control (p.75).
5 SCENE keys
Select the registered input source, sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when
it is in standby mode (p.46).
6 PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program (p.47).
7 External device operation keys
Select menus for external devices (p.109).
8 ON SCREEN key
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.
9 Menu operation keys
Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER Confirms a selected item.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen.
0 MODE key
Switches the iPod operation modes (p.60).
A Radio keys
Operate the FM/AM radio when “TUNER” is selected as the
input source (p.53).
BAND Switches between FM and AM radio.
PRESET Select a preset station.
TUNING Select the radio frequency.
External device operation keys
Let you play back and perform other operations for external
devices when an input source other than “TUNER” is
selected (p.109).
B Sound mode keys
Select a sound mode (p.47).
C INFO key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.77).
D SLEEP key
Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a
specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press
repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off).
E Numeric keys
Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies.
MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets (p.54).
F TV operation keys
Let you select TV input and volume, and perform other TV
operations (p.108).
G HDMI OUT key (RX-V775 only)
Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output
(p.45).
H PARTY key (RX-V775 only)
Turns on/off the party mode (p.76).
I VOLUME keys
Adjust the volume.
J MUTE key
Mutes the audio output.
K OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.78).
L DISPLAY key
Displays status information on the TV (p.77).
M CODE SET key
Registers remote control codes of external devices on the
remote control (p.108).
• To operate external devices with the remote control, register a
remote control code for each device before using (p.108).
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
6 87
123 4
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
123 4
12
12
3 4
SUR. DECODE
H
J
G
K
L
M
1
3
2
5
4
6
I
7
E
D
F
8
A
B
:
C
9
(RX-V775 U.S.A. model)
PREPARATIONS ➤ General setup procedure En 14
PREPARATIONS
This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!
General setup procedure
1 Placing speakers (p.15)
Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place them in your room.
2 Connecting speakers (p.19)
Connect the speakers to the unit.
3 Connecting a TV (p.23)
Connect a TV to the unit.
4 Connecting playback devices (p.28)
Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit.
5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.32)
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
6 Connecting to a network (p.33)
Connect the unit to a network.
7 Connecting other devices (p.34)
Connect external devices, such as an external power amplifier (RX-V775 only) and recording devices.
8 Connecting the power cable (p.35)
After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.
9
Selecting an on-screen menu language
(p.36)
Select the desired on-screen menu language (default: English).
10
Optimizing the speaker settings
automatically (YPAO) (p.37)
Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room
(YPAO).
PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 15
Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place the speakers and subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) in your room. This section describes the
representative speaker layout examples.
• For information on the ideal speaker layout, see “Ideal speaker layout” (p.122).
• If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers or presence speakers.
To reinforce the rear right/left sounds, use them as surround back speakers.
To create a natural 3-dimensional sound field, use them as presence speakers.
• Two subwoofers connected to the unit output the same sounds.
1 Placing speakers
Caution
• Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.18).
Speaker type Abbr. Function
Speaker system (the number of channels)
7.1+2 7.1 7.1 6.1 5.1
Front
5.1
4.1 3.1 2.1
Front (L) 1
Produce front right/left channel sounds (stereo sounds).
● ●●●● ● ●●●
Front (R) 2 ● ●●●● ● ●●●
Center 3 Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogue and vocals). ●●●●●● ●
Surround (L) 4
Produce surround right/left channel sounds. Surround speakers also produce surround back channel
sounds when no surround back speakers are connected.
●●●●● ●
Surround (R) 5 ●●●●● ●
Surround back (L) 6
Produce surround back left/right channel sounds.
●●
Surround back (R) 7 ●●
Surround back 8 Produces sounds mixed from surround back left/right channel sounds. ●
Presence (L) Q
Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA DSP 3D (p.48), the presence speakers
create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your room.
●● ●
Presence (R) W ●● ●
Subwoofer 9
Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces the bass parts of other channels.
This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.
● ●●●● ● ●●●
1
Speaker placement
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 16
7.1+2-channel system
• The surround back speakers and presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit
automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the selected CINEMA DSP (p.48).
7.1-channel system (using presence speakers)
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural
3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying 5.1-channel contents.
7.1-channel system (using surround back speakers)
This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and
surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to
enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers.
6.1-channel system
This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and
surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to
enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speaker.
45
1
2
39
67
QW
9
45
1
2
39
QW
45
1
2
39
67
45
1
2
39
8
1
Speaker placement
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 17
5.1-channel system
This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and
surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying
5.1-channel contents.
Front 5.1-channel system
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural
3-dimensional sound field, and creates the virtual surround speakers using the front
speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP).
4.1-channel system
2.1-channel system
Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround
speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound
(Virtual CINEMA DSP).
• Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system.
45
12
39
1
2
39
QW
45
12
9
12
9
1
Speaker placement
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 18
■ Setting the speaker impedance
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting
6-ohm speakers, set the speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also
use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
1
Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall
outlet.
2
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press
MAIN ZONE z.
3
Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front display.
4
Press STRAIGHT to select “6 Ω MIN”.
5
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the
power cable from the AC wall outlet.
You are now ready to connect the speakers.
MAIN ZONE z
STRAIGHT
SPIMP.8MIN
1
Speaker placement
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 19
Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.
The following diagrams provide connections for 7.1+2-,
7.1-, and 6.1-channel systems as examples. For other
systems, connect speakers while referring to the
connection diagram for the 6.1-channel system.
Cables required for connection
(commercially available)
Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)
Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers)
7.1+2-channel system 7.1-channel system
(using surround back speakers)
2 Connecting speakers
Caution
• Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn
off the subwoofer before connecting the speakers.
• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch
one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts.
Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker
cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front
display when the unit is turned on.
• The illustrations of the unit (rear) used in this section are of the
RX-V775.
–
+
–
+
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SPEAKERS
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
ZONE2/F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
CENTER
1
2
1
67
2
3
45
9
9
QW
The unit (rear)
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SPEAKERS
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
ZONE2/F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
CENTER
1
2
1
67
2
3
45
9
The unit (rear)
1 2
Speaker connections
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 20
7.1-channel system
(using presence speakers)
6.1-channel system
■ Connecting speaker cables
Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting
the negative (-) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and
the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are
colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to
the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal.
a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from
the ends of the speaker cable and twist the bare wires of
the cable firmly together.
b Loosen the speaker terminal.
c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side
(upper right or bottom left) of the terminal.
d Tighten the terminal.
Using a banana plug
(U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia and General models only)
a Tighten the speaker terminal.
b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SPEAKERS
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
ZONE2/F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
CENTER
1
2
12
3
45
9
QW
The unit (rear)
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SPEAKERS
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
ZONE2/F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
CENTER
1
2
12
3
45
9
8
When using only one surround back speaker, connect it
to the SINGLE jack (L side).
The unit (rear)
FRONT
aa
b
d
c
+ (red)
- (black)
FRONT
a
b
Banana plug
1 2
Speaker connections
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 21
Push-type speaker terminals
(RX-V675 only)
a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from
the ends of the speaker cable, and twist the bare wires of
the cable firmly together.
b Press down the tab.
c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the hole in the
terminal.
d Release the tab.
■ Connecting the subwoofer
Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.
Connecting front speakers that
support bi-amp connections
When using front speakers that support bi-amp
connections, connect them to the FRONT jacks and
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP jacks.
To enable the bi-amp function, set “Power Amp Assign”
(p.91) in the “Setup” menu to “5ch BI-AMP” after
connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet.
• The FRONT jacks and SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP/ZONE B jacks
output the same signals.
Z
ONE 2/F.PRESENCE
EX
TRA SP
aa
b
c
d
+ (red)
- (black)
Audio pin cable
12
3
45
9
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SPEAKERS
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
ZONE2/F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
CENTER
1
2
The unit (rear)
Caution
• Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or
cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the
instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not
making bi-amp connections, make sure that the brackets or
cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables.
• Surround back speakers cannot be used during bi-amp
connections.
1 2
Speaker connections
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Input/output jacks and cables En 22
■ Video/audio jacks
❑ HDMI jacks
Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single
jack. Use an HDMI cable.
• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using
a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality
degradation.
• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return
Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K video transmission features.
• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K videos.
❑ HDMI/MHL jack
Transmits digital video and digital sound. Use an MHL
cable.
• The VIDEO AUX jack on the front panel of the unit supports both
HDMI and MHL connections. Use a cable that matches the jack on
your MHL-compatible mobile device. When connecting an
HDMI-compatible playback device to the VIDEO AUX jack, use an
HDMI cable. For details on an MHL connection, see “MHL
connection” (p.32).
■ Video jacks
❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
Transmit video signals separated into three
components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (P
B),
and chrominance red (P
R). Use a component video
cable with three plugs.
❑ VIDEO jacks
Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.
■ Audio jacks
❑ OPTICAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical
cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before
using the cable.
❑ COAXIAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial
cable.
❑ AUDIO jacks
Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin
cable (RCA cable).
Input/output jacks and cables
HDMI cable
MHL cable
T
OR OUT
Component video cable
Video pin cable
OPTICAL
Digital optical cable
COAXIAL
Digital coaxial cable
Stereo pin cable
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 23
Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.
You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.
The connection method varies depending on the functions and video input jacks
available on your TV.
Refer to the instruction manual of the TV and choose a connection method.
■
Connection Method 1 (HDMI Control/ARC-compatible TV)
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable.
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters
(p.96) in the “Setup” menu.
• (RX-V775 only)
HDMI Control is available only on the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
• Use an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV
(except some component video signals), regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the
unit. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.126).
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and
network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV.
• (RX-V775 only)
You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.27).
3 Connecting a TV
About HDMI Control
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV
that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s
power and volume with the TV’s remote control. You can also control playback
devices (such as an HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player) connected to the
unit with an HDMI cable. For details, see “HDMI Control” (p.127).
About Audio Return Channel (ARC)
ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways under HDMI Control. If you connect a
TV that supports HDMI Control and ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you
can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.
Does your TV support
Audio Return Channel (ARC)?
Does your TV support
HDMI Control?
Does your TV have an
HDMI input jack?
■ Connection Method 3 (p.26)
■ Connection Method 2 (p.25)
■ Connection Method 1 (p.23)
■ Connection Method 4 (p.27)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
Y
P
R
VID
E
M
O
H
(
B
D
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6
AV OUT
ZONE
O
ZON
E
NETWORKDC OUT
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
5V
0.5A
(
NET
)
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(
RADIO
)
HDMI
ARC
HDMI
12
OUT
ARC
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI OUT (ARC) jack
HDMI input
(ARC-compatible)
The unit (rear)
TV
1 2 3
TV connection
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 24
❑ Necessary settings
To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the following settings.
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.
1
After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices)
and the power cable to the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
2
Configure the settings of the unit.
a Check that ARC is enabled on the TV.
b Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
c Press ON SCREEN.
d Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
e Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.
f Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.
g Use the cursor keys to select “On”.
h Press ON SCREEN.
3
Configure the settings for HDMI Control.
a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI
Control-compatible BD/DVD player).
b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices.
c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV’s main power.
d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
e Check the following.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,
select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or
adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
This completes the necessary settings.
If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be
automatically switched to “AV 4” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
If you cannot hear the TV’s audio, check that “ARC” (p.97) in the “Setup” menu is set to
“On”.
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again)
the devices. It may solve the problem.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.97) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use a digital
optical cable to input TV audio to the unit (p.25).
• “AV 4” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks,
use “TV Audio Input” (p.96) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the
SCENE function (p.46), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
ON SCREEN
Cursor keys
ENTER
1 2 3
TV connection
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 25
■ Connection Method 2 (HDMI Control-compatible TV)
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable.
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters
(p.96) in the “Setup” menu.
• (RX-V775 only)
HDMI Control is available only on the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV
(except some component video signals), regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the
unit. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.126).
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and
network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV.
• (RX-V775 only)
You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.27).
❑ Necessary settings
To use HDMI Control, you need to configure the following settings.
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.
1
After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback
devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and
playback devices.
2
Configure the settings of the unit.
a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
b Press ON SCREEN.
c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
d Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.
e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.
f Use the cursor keys to select “On”.
g Press ON SCREEN.
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
Y
P
R
VID
E
M
O
H
(
B
D
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6
AV OUT
ZONE
O
ZON
E
NETWORKDC OUT
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
5V
0.5A
(
NET
)
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(
RADIO
)
OPTICAL
O
O
HDMI
HDMI
12
OUT
ARC
HDMI
HDMI
OPTICAL
AV4
(TV)
The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT jack
AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack
Audio output
(digital optical)
TV
HDMI input
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
ON SCREEN
Cursor keys
ENTER
1 2 3
TV connection
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 26
3
Configure the settings for HDMI Control.
a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as a HDMI
Control-compatible BD/DVD player).
b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices.
c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
e Check the following.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,
select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or
adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
This completes the necessary settings.
If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be
automatically switched to “AV 4” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again)
the devices. It may solve the problem.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
• “AV 4” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks or
if you want to use another input jack (other than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, use “TV Audio Input”
(p.96) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.46),
you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
■ Connection Method 3 (TV with HDMI input jacks)
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable.
If you switch the input source of the unit to “AV 4” using the AV 4 or SCENE(TV) keys,
the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV
(except some component video signals), regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the
unit. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.126).
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and
network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV.
• If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks or if you want to use another input jack (other
than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, connect the TV to one of the AV 1–6 and AUDIO 1–2 jacks. To use
the SCENE function (p.46), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
• (RX-V775 only)
You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.27).
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
Y
P
R
VID
E
M
O
H
(
B
D
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6
AV OUT
ZONE
O
ZON
E
NETWORKDC OUT
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
5V
0.5A
(
NET
)
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(
RADIO
)
OPTICAL
O
O
HDMI
HDMI
12
OUT
ARC
HDMI
HDMI
OPTICAL
AV4
(TV)
The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT jack
AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack
Audio output
(digital optical)
TV
HDMI input
1 2 3
TV connection
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 27
■ Connection Method 4 (TV without HDMI input jacks)
When connecting any video device to the AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the
unit, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks.
When connecting any video device to the AV 3–6 (VIDEO) jacks or the front VIDEO jack
of the unit, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack.
If you select “AV 4” as the input source by pressing AV 4 or SCENE(TV), the TV audio
will be played back on the unit.
• If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be
output to the TV.
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.
• If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks or if you want to use another input jack (other
than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, connect the TV to one of the AV 1–6 and AUDIO 1–2 jacks. To use
the SCENE function (p.46), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable)
❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable)
■ Connecting another TV or a projector
(RX-V775 only)
The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit
with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching
videos with the remote control (p.45).
• HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack.
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
Y
P
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
H
(
BD/DVD
)
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6
AV OUT
ZONE OUT
S
U
FRONT
ZONE 2
NETWORKDC OUT
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
5V
0.5A
(
NET
)
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(
RADIO
)
P
R
P
B
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
TOR OUT
P
B
Y
P
R
OPTICAL
O
O
OPTICAL
AV4
(TV)
The unit (rear)
MONITOR OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO)
jacks
Video input
(component video)
AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack
Audio output
(digital optical)
TV
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
Y
P
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
H
(
BD/DVD
)
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6
AV OUT
ZONE OUT
S
U
FRONT
ZONE 2
NETWORKDC OUT
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
5V
0.5A
(
NET
)
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(
RADIO
)
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR
V
V
OPTICAL
O
O
OPTICAL
AV4
(TV)
The unit (rear)
MONITOR OUT
(VIDEO) jack
Video input
(composite video)
AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack
Audio output
(digital optical)
TV
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
Y
P
R
VID
E
M
O
H
(
B
D
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6
AV OUT
ZONE
O
ZON
E
NETWORKDC OUT
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
5V
0.5A
(
NET
)
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(
RADIO
)
HDMI
HDMI
12
OUT
ARC
HDMI
HDMI
The unit
(rear)
HDMI OUT 2 jack
HDMI input
Projector
TV (already connected)
TV
1 2 3
TV connection
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 28
The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow
you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect
an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages.
– Connecting an iPod (p.58)
– Connecting a USB storage device (p.62)
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)
Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game
consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video
device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI
connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack.
• If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change
its combination according to the output jacks of your device (p.29).
■ HDMI connection
Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.
If you select the input source by pressing HDMI 1–5, the video/audio played back on
the video device will be output from the unit.
• To watch videos input to the HDMI 1–5 jacks, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the
unit (p.23 to 26).
■ Component video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable
(digital optical or digital coaxial). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on
the audio output jacks available on your video device.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–2, the video/audio played back on the
video device will be output from the unit.
• The component video signals (other than 480i/576i signals) input to AV 1–2 jacks of the unit can be output
from the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks only. To watch those videos, you need to connect
your TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the unit (p.27).
4 Connecting playback devices
O
1
AUDI O 2
P
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5
(
BD/DVD
)
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
FRONT CENTER
SPEAKERS
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6
AV OUT
ZONE OUT
SUBWOOFER
SUR. BACKSURROUND
FRONT
PRE OUT
CENTER
SINGLE
ZONE 2
K
T
VIDEO
CENTER
1
2
HDMI
OUT
(
RADIO
)
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 4 HDMI 5HDMI 3HDMI 2
The unit (rear)
HDMI output
Video device
HDMI 1–5 jacks
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio
Component video
Digital optical AV 1 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Digital coaxial AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
Y
P
R
VID
E
M
O
H
(
B
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6
AV OUT
ZONE
ZON
E
NETWORKDC OUT
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
5V
0.5A
(
NET
)
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(
RADIO
)
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
OPTICAL
AV2
AV 1
P
B
Y
P
R
COMPONENT VIDEO
O
O
C
C
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
The unit
(rear)
AV 1–2
(COMPONENT VIDEO)
jacks
Video output
(component video)
Video device
Audio output
(digital optical or digital coaxial)
AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack or
AV 2 (COAXIAL) jack
1 2 3 4
Playback device connections
5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 29
■ Composite video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital
coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)
depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 3–6, the video/audio played back on the
video device will be output from the unit.
• To watch videos input to the AV 3–6 (VIDEO) jacks, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack
(p.23 to 26) or to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack (p.27) of the unit.
■ Changing the combination of video/audio input jacks
If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your
video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device. You
can connect a video device that has the following video/audio output jacks.
❑ Necessary setting
For example, if you have connected a video device to AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) and
AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks of the unit, change the combination setting as follows.
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio
Composite video
Digital coaxial AV 3 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Digital optical AV 4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Analog stereo AV 5–6 (VIDEO + AUDIO)
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
Y
P
R
12
ARC
AN
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6
A
NETWORKDC OUT
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
5V
0.5A
(
NET
)
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(
R
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
VIDEO
CC
L
R
L
R
OO
V
V
The unit (rear)
AV 3–6 (VIDEO)
jack
Video output
(composite video)
Video device
Audio output
(either digital optical,
digital coaxial, or analog stereo)
Any of AV 3 (COAXIAL) jack,
AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack,
AV 5–6 (AUDIO) jacks
Output jacks on video device Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio Video Audio
HDMI
Digital optical HDMI 1–5
AV 1 (OPTICAL)
AV 4 (OPTICAL)
Digital coaxial HDMI 1–5 AV 2–3 (COAXIAL)
Analog stereo HDMI 1–5
AV 5–6 (AUDIO)
AUDIO 1–2
Component video Analog stereo
AV 1–2
(COMPONENT
VIDEO)
AV 5–6 (AUDIO)
AUDIO 1–2
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
Y
P
R
12
ARC
ANTEN
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6
AV O
U
NETWORKDC OUT
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
5V
0.5A
(
NET
)
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(
RADI
O
AV 5
R
L
AUDIO
AV2
P
B
Y
P
R
L
R
L
R
P
R
P
B
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO)
jacks
Video output
(component video)
AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks
Video device
Audio output
(analog stereo)
The unit (rear)
1 2 3 4
Playback device connections
5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 30
• The following operation is available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.
1
After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback
devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit.
2
Press AV 2 to select “AV 2” (video input jack to be used) as the input
source.
3
Press ON SCREEN.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “AV2” (video input jack to be
used) and press the cursor key (q).
6
Use the cursor keys to select “Audio In” and press ENTER.
7
Use the cursor keys to select “AV5” (audio input jack to be used).
8
Press ON SCREEN.
This completes the necessary settings.
If you select “AV 2” as the input source by pressing AV 2, the video/audio played back
on the video device will be output from the unit.
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
DISPLA
Y
RETURN
OPTION
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MEN
U
NET
TUNER
USB
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
12
12
34
N
TUNE
R
US
B
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V-AU
X
1
1
2
3
4
ON SCREEN
ENTER
AV 2
Cursor keys
1 2 3 4
Playback device connections
5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 31
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)
Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit.
Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the
following connections.
* RX-V775 only (except for U.S.A. and Canada models)
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–6, AUDIO 1–2 or PHONO*, the audio
played back on the audio device will be output from the unit.
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel
Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit.
Use the USB jack to connect an iPod or a USB storage device. For details, see
“Connecting an iPod” (p.58) or “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.62).
Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on
the unit.
❑ HDMI connection
Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the
unit with an HDMI cable.
If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played
back on the device will be output from the unit.
• To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT
jack of the unit (p.23 to 26).
• You need to prepare an HDMI cable that match the output jacks on your device.
• When “USB” is selected as the input source, video signals input to the VIDEO jack are output from the
HDMI OUT and MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jacks.
Audio output jacks on audio device Audio output jacks on the unit
Digital optical
AV 1 (OPTICAL)
AV 4 (OPTICAL)
Digital coaxial AV 2–3 (COAXIAL)
Analog stereo
AV 5–6 (AUDIO)
AUDIO 1–2
Turntable (PHONO) PHONO*
When connecting a turntable
(RX-V775 only [except for U.S.A. and Canada models])
• The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a
low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer.
• Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal.
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
Y
P
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1 HDMI 2
(
BD/DVD
)
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6
AV OUT
ZONE OUT
SURROUND
FRONT
PR
ZONE 2
NETWORKDC OUT
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
5V
0.5A
(
NET
)
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(
RADIO
)
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
R
L
PHONO
GND
PHONO
GND
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
C
L
R
L
R
O
O
L
R
L
R
C
Audio output
(either digital optical,
digital coaxial, or analog stereo)
AV 1–6 jacks
AUDIO 1–2 jacks
The unit
(rear)
Audio device
PHONO jacks*
Audio output (PHONO)
Turntable
Ground lead
CONTROL
TV
BD
DVD
NET
RADIO
PHONES
SILENT
CINEMA
STRAIGHT
VIDEO
HDMI/
5V 2.1A
VIDEO
AUX
TONE
PROGRAM
YPAO MIC
MHL 5V 1A
HDMI
Game console
Camcorder
The unit (front)
1 2 3 4
Playback device connections
5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the FM/AM antennas En 32
❑ MHL connection
Connect an MHL-compatible mobile device (such as smartphones) to the unit with an
MHL cable. You can enjoy full HD videos and multichannel audio sources stored on the
mobile device. The VIDEO AUX jack of the unit enables you to input videos and audio
directly from the mobile device to the unit.
If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played
back on the mobile device will be output from the unit.
• To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the
unit (p.23 to 26).
• You need to prepare an MHL cable that match the jack on your mobile device.
• You can operate the mobile device using the menu operation keys, external device operation keys and
numeric keys on the remote control. However, some features may not be compatible, depending on the
mobile device or its application. In this case, operate the mobile device itself.
• If “Standby Through” (p.97) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, you can output mobile device videos/audio
to the TV or operate the mobile device using the remote control of the unit even when the unit is in standby
mode.
• The unit supplies power to the mobile device in the following conditions.
– The unit is turned on.
– The unit is in standby mode while “Standby Through” (p.97) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.
Assembling and connecting the AM antenna
• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.
• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.
CONTROL
TV
BD
DVD
NET
RADIO
PHONES
SILENT
CINEMA
STRAIGHT
VIDEO
HDMI/
5V 2.1A
VIDEO
AUX
TONE
PROGRAM
YPAO MIC
MHL 5V 1A
MHL
MHL
Mobile device
MHL output
The unit (front)
5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
Y
P
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5
(
BD/DVD
)
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SPEAKERS
VIDEO
CENTER
NETWORKDC OUT
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
5V
0.5A
(
NET
)
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
CENTER
HDMI
OUT
(
RADIO
)
FM antenna
AM antenna
The unit (rear)
Hold down Insert Release
1 2 3 4
Playback device connections
5
FM/AM antenna connections
6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network En 33
Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5
or higher straight cable).
You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and
Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.
• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit,
as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to
configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network
parameters manually (p.98).
• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Network” (p.104) in the “Information” menu.
• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router)
may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the
security software or firewall settings appropriately.
• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.
• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.
6 Connecting to a network
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
Y
P
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1 HDMI 2
(
BD/DVD
)
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6
AV OUT
ZONE OUT
SUR. BA
C
SURROUND
FRONT
PRE OUT
SING
L
ZONE 2
NETWORKDC OUT
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
5V
0.5A
(
NET
)
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(
RADIO
)
LAN
WAN
Network Attached Storage
(NAS)
Internet
Modem
Router
Network cable
PC
The unit (rear)
Mobile device
(such as iPod touch
and iPhone)
1 2 3 4 5 6
Network connections
7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting other devices En 34
Connecting an external power amplifier
(RX-V775 only)
When connecting an external power amplifier (pre-main amplifier) to enhance speaker
output, connect the input jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit.
The same channel signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their
corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.
1 FRONT jacks
Output front channel sounds.
2 SURROUND jacks
Output surround channel sounds.
3 SUR. BACK jacks
Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one external amplifier for the surround
back channel, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side).
4 SUBWOOFER1–2 jacks
For connecting a subwoofer with built-in amplifier. When 2 subwoofers are connected, the same
sound is output from them.
5 CENTER jack
Outputs center channel sounds.
Connecting recording devices
You can connect video/audio recording devices to the AV OUT jacks. These jacks
output analog video/audio signals selected as the input.
• To copy video/audio from a video device, connect the video device to the AV 5–6 jacks of the unit.
• To copy audio from an audio device, connect the audio device to the AV 5–6 jacks or AUDIO 1–2 jacks of
the unit.
• Be sure to use the AV OUT jacks only for connecting recording devices.
7 Connecting other devices
Caution
• To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making
connections.
– Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them.
– When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS
terminals.
– When using an external amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, do not connect other
devices (except the unit) to the amplifier.
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5
(
BD/DVD
)
2
ANTENNA
FM
AM
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SPEAKERS
AV 6
AV OUT
ZONE OUT
SUBWOOFER
SUR. BACKSURROUND
FRONT
PRE OUT
CENTER
SINGLE
ZONE 2
ZONE2/F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
CENTER
1
2
H
DMI
OUT
(
RADIO
)
1 2 34
5
The unit (rear)
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
C
AL
C
AL
X
IAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
Y
P
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI
(
BD/DVD
)
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6
AV OUT
ZONE OUT
SUBW
O
SUR. BACKSURROUND
FRONT
PRE OUT
CEN
T
SINGLE
ZONE 2
NETWORKDC OUT
5V
0.5A
(
NET
)
COMPONENT VIDEO
CEN
T
1
2
HDMI
OUT
(
RADIO
)
R
L
AUDIO
R
L
AUDIO
AV OUT
VIDEO
V
V
L
R
L
R
L
R
The unit (rear)
AV OUT jacks
Video/audio input
Video recording
device
Audio recording
device
Audio input
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Other connections
8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the power cable En 35
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function
The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the
unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that
supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the
trigger function by connecting the external device to the TRIGGER OUT jack.
• You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output” (p.101) in the “Setup” menu.
After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
Y
P
R
12
ARC
ANTENNA
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6
AV OUT
NETWORKDC OUT
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
5V
0.5A
(
NET
)
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(
RADIO
)
TRIGGER OUT
12V
0.1A
The unit (rear)
TRIGGER OUT jack
System
connection
input
Yamaha subwoofer that
supports a system connection
8 Connecting the power cable
Before connecting the power cable (General model only)
Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage.
Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz.
• Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC
wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a
potential fire hazard.
U
ND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
ZONE2/F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
220V
-
240V
110V
-
120V
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
The unit (rear)
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
5
CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SPEAKERS
ZONE2/F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
To an AC wall outlet
The unit (rear)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Other connections
8
Power cable connection
9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤ Selecting an on-screen menu language En 36
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
ON SCREEN
ENTER
RECEIVER z
Select the desired on-screen menu language from English
(default), Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and
Chinese.
1
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
3
Press ON SCREEN.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and
the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired
language.
6
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
7
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.
9 Selecting an on-screen menu language
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Language setting
10
Cursor keys
PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 37
The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function
detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to
your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the
speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic
parameters, to suit your room.
• The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control)
technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically
designed for acoustic perfection.
• Please note the following when using YPAO.
– Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to the unit.
– During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume. Ensure that
the test tones do not frighten small children. Also, refrain from using this function
at night when it may be a nuisance to others.
– During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume.
– During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible.
– Do not connect headphones.
1
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
3
Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If
the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to
maximum.
• If you are using bi-amp connection or Zone2 speakers, set “Power Amp
Assign” (p.91) in the “Setup” menu to the appropriate setting before starting
YPAO.
4
Place the YPAO microphone at your listening
position (same height as your ears) and connect it
to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.
10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
VOLUME HIGH CUT
CROSSOVER/
MIN MAXMIN MAX
9
YPAO MIC
9
12
3
45
The unit (front)
YPAO
microphone
Ear height
Place the YPAO microphone at
your listening position (same height
as your ears). We recommend the
use of a tripod as a microphone
stand. You can use the tripod
screws to stabilize the microphone.
YPAO MIC
jack
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Automatic speaker setup
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
RECEIVER z
PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 38
The following screen appears on the TV.
(RX-V675)
(RX-V775)
(RX-V675)
This completes the preparations.
See “Measuring at one listening position (single measure)”
(p.39) to start the measurement.
(RX-V775)
Proceed to Step 5.
• To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting
the measurement.
• To configure the power amplifier assignment setting, press RETURN and
select “Manual Setup” (p.91).
5
(RX-V775 only) If desired, change the measuring
method (multi/single).
a Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” and press ENTER.
b Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER.
Settings
• If the cursor keys do not work, the remote control may be set to operate external
devices. In this case, press RECEIVER and then use the cursor keys.
• If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to
enjoy surround sound in a wider space.
• If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening
position you will be seated most frequently.
Yes
Select this option if you will have several listening
positions or if you want others to enjoy surround sound.
You can take measurements at up to 8 different
positions in the room. The speaker settings will be
optimized to suit the area defined by those positions
(multi measure).
No (default)
Select this option if your listening position will always be
fixed. Take the measurements at only one position. The
speaker settings will be optimized to suit that position
(single measure).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Automatic speaker setup
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
ENTER
RETURN
RECEIVER
Cursor keys
PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 39
This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the
measurement.
When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”:
“Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) (RX-V775
only)” (p.40)
When “Multi Position” is set to “No”:
“Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.39)
Measuring at one listening position
(single measure)
Follow the procedure below for measurement.
• Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the
measurement process (about 3 minutes).
• Move to the corner of the room or leave the room.
1
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Measure” and press ENTER.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER
again to start the measurement immediately.
• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.
The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement finishes.
• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1)
appears, see “Error messages” (p.43) or “Warning messages” (p.44).
• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see
“Checking the measurement results” (p.41).
a b
a
a
b
c
d
e
c
d
de
bac
Multi measure
(5 listening positions)
Multi measure
(2 listening positions + front/back)
Multi measure
(1 listening position + front/back/left/right)
Single measure
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
ENTER
RETURN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Automatic speaker setup
Cursor keys
PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 40
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and
press ENTER.
3
To save the measurement results, use the cursor
keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
4
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
Measuring at multiple listening positions
(multi measure) (RX-V775 only)
When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for
measurement.
• Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the
measurement process. It takes about 10 minutes to measure 8 listening positions.
• Move to the corner of the room or leave the room.
• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears,
see “Error messages” (p.43) or “Warning messages” (p.44).
1
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Measure” and press ENTER.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER
again to start the measurement immediately.
• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.
The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement at the first position finishes.
2
Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening
position and press ENTER.
Repeat step 2 until measurements at all listening positions
(up to 8) have been taken.
Caution
• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
ENTER
RETURN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Automatic speaker setup
Cursor keys
PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 41
3
When the measurements at the positions you want
to measure are completed, use the cursor keys to
select “CANCEL” and press ENTER.
When you have taken measurements at 8 listening
positions, the following screen appears automatically.
• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see
“Checking the measurement results” (p.41).
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and
press ENTER.
5
To save the measurement result, use the cursor
keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
6
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
Checking the measurement results
You can check the YPAO measurement results.
1
After the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Result” and press ENTER.
• You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.89) in the “Setup” menu,
which displays the previous measurement results.
The following screen appears.
1 Measurement result items
2 Measurement result details
3 The number of measured positions (when multi
measure is performed) * RX-V775 only
Caution
• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
1
2
3
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
ENTER
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Automatic speaker setup
Cursor keys
PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 42
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item.
• A speaker with a problem is indicated with a message enclosed in a red box.
3
To finish checking the results and return to the
previous screen, press RETURN.
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments
When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not
suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings
and reload the previous YPAO adjustments.
1
In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto
Setup”, and then “Result” (p.88).
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and
press ENTER.
3
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Wiring
Polarity of each speaker
Normal: The speaker cable is connected with the
correct polarity (+/-).
Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the
reverse polarity (+/-).
Size
Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the
subwoofer)
Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.
Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.
Distance Distance from the listening position to each speaker
Level Output level adjustment for each speaker
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
ON SCREEN
ENTER
RETURN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Automatic speaker setup
Cursor keys
PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 43
Error messages
If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.
Error message Cause Remedy
E-1: No Front SP Front speakers are not detected.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections.E-2: No Sur. SP One of the surround speakers cannot be detected.
E-3: No F.PRNS SP One of the presence speakers cannot be detected.
E-4: SBR → SBL A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only.
When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the
on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker.
E-5: Noisy The noise is too loud.
Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select
“PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected.
E-6: Check Sur.
Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround
speakers are connected.
Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen
instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers.
E-7: No MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again.
E-8: No Signal The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service
center.
E-9: User Cancel The measurement has been canceled. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”.
E-10: Internal Error An internal error has occurred.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact
the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Automatic speaker setup
PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 44
Warning messages
If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.
However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.
Warning message Cause Remedy
W-1: Out of Phase
A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity
(+/-).
Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.41) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by
“Reverse”. If the speaker is connected incorrectly, turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable.
Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are
connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message.
W-2: Over Distance
A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening
position.
Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.41) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80
ft) of the listening position.
W-3: Level Error
There are significant volume differences between the
speakers.
Check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the
subwoofer. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as
possible.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Automatic speaker setup
PLAYBACK ➤ Basic playback procedure En 45
PLAYBACK
1
Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or
BD/DVD player) connected to the unit.
2
Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.
3
Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.
• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.53)
• Playing back iPod music (p.58)
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
(p.62)
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.65)
• Listening to Internet radio (p.68)
• Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
(p.70)
4
Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.
• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.
• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or TONE
CONTROL on the front panel (p.79).
On-screen input selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and
press ENTER.
Selecting an HDMI output jack (RX-V775 only)
1
Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack.
Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be
used for signal output changes.
• You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.46).
• When “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest
resolution supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For
example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p
TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.)
Basic playback procedure
HDMI OUT 1+2
Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1
and HDMI OUT 2 jacks.
HDMI OUT 1
Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack.
HDMI OUT 2
HDMI OUT Off Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SL SR
SBL SBR
HDMIOUT1+2
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
PR
OG
RAM
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
PART
Y
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
SU
R. DE
COD
E
ON SCREEN
ENTER
VOLUME
MUTE
HDMI OUT
Cursor keys
Input selection keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 46
The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source,
sound program, Compressed Music Enhancer on/off, and HDMI
output jack (RX-V775 only) with just one touch.
1
Press SCENE.
The input source and settings registered to the
corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on
automatically when it is in standby mode.
By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.
Configuring scene assignments
1
Perform the following operations to prepare the
settings you want to assign to a scene.
• Select an input source (p.45)
• Select a sound program (p.47)
• Enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.52)
• (RX-V775 only)
Selecting an HDMI output jack (p.45)
2
Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET
Complete” appears on the front display.
3
If you want to control the corresponding playback
device after selecting the scene, hold down the
corresponding SCENE key and input selection key
together for more than 3 seconds.
Once the setting is completed successfully, SOURCE blinks twice.
• If you have not registered the remote control code of the playback device yet, see
“Registering the remote control codes for playback devices” (p.109) to register it.
• You can also configure scene assignments in the “Scene” menu (p.83).
• The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external
device connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify
the device type in “Device Control” (p.84) in the “Scene” menu.
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
SCENE Input
Sound
program
Compressed
Music Enhancer
HDMI output jack
(RX-V775 only)
BD/DVD HDMI 1
MOVIE
(Sci-Fi)
Off HDMI OUT 1+2
TV AV 4 STRAIGHT On HDMI OUT 1+2
NET
NET
RADIO
MUSIC
(7ch Stereo)
On HDMI OUT 1+2
RADIO TUNER
MUSIC
(7ch Stereo)
On HDMI OUT 1+2
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
SETComplete
VOL.
SBL SBR
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
MO
D
E
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
SU
R. DE
COD
E
SCENE
SOURCE
Input selection keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 47
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and
surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with
your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo
playback).
❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for movies
• Press MOVIE repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing
video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games (p.49).
❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for music or
stereo playback
• Press MUSIC repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening
music sources or stereo playback (p.50).
❑ Selecting a surround decoder
• Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from
2-channel sources (p.51).
❑ Switching to the straight decode mode
• Press STRAIGHT.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels
(p.51).
❑ Switching to the Pure Direct mode
• Press PURE DIRECT.
This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the
electrical noise from other circuitry (p.52).
❑ Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer
• Press ENHANCER.
This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth
and breadth (p.52).
On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press
ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround
decoder and press ENTER.
• You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing
PROGRAM.
• You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in
the “Sound Program” menu (p.85).
• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.
• When you play back audio signals with a sampling rate of higher than 96 kHz, the
straight decode mode (p.51) is automatically selected.
• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the
speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.10) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in
the “Information” menu (p.103).
Selecting the sound mode
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
MOVIE
MUSIC
SUR.DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
PURE DIRECT
ON SCREEN
ENTER
PROGRAM
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 48
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields
(CINEMA DSP 3D)
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize
Yamaha’s original DSP technology (CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you
to easily create sound fields like actual movie theaters or concert
halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound fields.
• To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.79) in the
“Option” menu to “Off”.
• We recommend using presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of
the stereoscopic sound fields. However, even when no presence speakers are
connected, the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front,
center, and surround speakers to produce stereoscopic sound fields.
■ Enjoying sound field effects without
surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)
If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and
7ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, the unit
utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround technology to reproduce
up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the
well-oriented sound field only with the front-side speakers. We
recommend using presence speakers in order to enjoy more
effective stereoscopic sound field.
Enjoying surround sound with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel
speaker system, with stereo headphones by connecting the
headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program
or a surround decoder.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
3
Hall in Vienna
VOL.
PL PR
“CINEMA DSP n” lights up
Sound program category
Sound program
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 49
■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)
The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as
movies, TV programs, and games.
❑ MOVIE THEATER
❑ ENTERTAINMENT
Standard
This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling
without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio,
such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the
ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful
reverberations from the left, right, and rear.
Spectacle
This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie
productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the
cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing
everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms.
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the
latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of
cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear
separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music.
Adventure
This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and
adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but
puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides,
powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth
creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation
of the sounds and the separation of the channels.
Drama
This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of
movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The
reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects
and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not
impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for
long periods.
Mono Movie
This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies,
in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a
pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate
reverberation to the original audio.
Sports
This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts
and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’
voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the
stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of
the fans in a suitable space.
Action Game
This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting
games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player
feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater
concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.
Roleplaying Game
This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This
program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction
of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of
scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field.
Music Video
This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as
if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere
thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence
sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround
sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 50
■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback
(MUSIC)
The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.
You can also select stereo playback.
❑ CLASSICAL
❑ LIVE/CLUB
❑ STEREO
• CINEMA DSP 3D (p.48) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.48) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo” is
selected.
Hall in Munich
This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500
seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful
reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s
virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.
Hall in Vienna
This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a
shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings
create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience,
producing a very full, rich sound.
Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an
audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable
for courtly music and chamber music.
Cellar Club
This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and
homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds
that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small
stage.
The Roxy Theatre
This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert
venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the
hall.
The Bottom Line
This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a
famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left
and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
2ch Stereo
Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When
multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and
output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).
7ch Stereo
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back
multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and
then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties.
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 51
Enjoying unprocessed playback
You can play back input sources without any sound field effect
processing.
■ Playing back in original channels
(straight decode)
When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces
stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as
CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for
multichannel sources.
1
Press STRAIGHT.
Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is
enabled or disabled.
• To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround
back speakers are used, set “Extended Surround” (p.80) in the “Option” menu to a
setting other than “Off”.
■ Playing back 2-channel sources in
multichannel (surround decoder)
The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel
playback from 2-channel sources. When a multichannel source is
input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode.
For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.123).
1
Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder.
Each time you press the key, the surround decoder
changes.
• You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are
connected or when “Surround Back” in the “Setup” menu is set to “None”.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
STRAIGHT
VOL.
SBL SBR
bPro Logic
Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all
sources.
bPLIIx Movie
Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for movies.
bPLII Movie
bPLIIx Music
Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for music.
bPLII Music
bPLIIx Game
Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for games.
bPLII Game
Neo:6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for movies.
Neo:6 Music Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for music.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
ProLogic
VOL.
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
STRAIGHT
SUR.DECODE
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 52
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct)
When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the
selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the
electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It
allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.
1
Press PURE DIRECT.
Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is
enabled or disabled.
• When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available.
– Some settings for the speakers or sound programs
– Operating the on-screen and “Option” menus
– Using the multi-zone function
– Output from the AV OUT jacks
– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced
sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)
Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the
sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original
sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along
with any other sound modes.
1
Press ENHANCER.
Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer
is enabled or disabled.
• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling
rate is over 48 kHz.
• You can also use “Enhancer” (p.80) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable
Compressed Music Enhancer.
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SL SR
SBL SBR
PUREDIRECT
SW
C
L
SL SR
ENHANCER
R
Enhancer On
VOL.
SBL SBR
“ENHANCER” lights up
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
PURE DIRECT
ENHANCER
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 53
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or
selecting from registered radio stations.
• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is
being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used
in U.K. and Europe models.
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM
antennas.
Setting the frequency steps
(Asia and General models only)
At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and
9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the
frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM.
1
Set the unit to standby mode.
2
When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel,
press MAIN ZONE z.
3
Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TU”.
4
Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.
5
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby
mode and turn it on again.
Selecting a frequency for reception
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM).
3
Use the following keys to set a frequency.
TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the
key for about a second to search stations automatically.
Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to
select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio
station.
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
• “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of
reception range.
• You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM
radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.80) in the “Option” menu. When the signal
reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may
improve it.
Listening to FM/AM radio
MAIN ZONE z
STRAIGHTPROGRAM
TUFM50/AM9
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
VOL.
SBL SBR
FM87.50MHz
VOL.
STEREO
TUNED
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
SBL SBR
FM98.50MHz
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
P
RE
S
E
T
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
TUNING
BAND
TUNER
Numeric keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 54
Registering favorite radio stations (presets)
You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
preset numbers.
• You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using
“Auto Preset” (p.57).
■ Registering a radio station
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
1
Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.53)
to tune into the desired radio station.
2
Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected
radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”.
Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered
to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most
recently registered number.
• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning
into the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and
then press MEMORY again.
■ Selecting a preset station
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
station.
You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by
using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.
• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.
• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
• To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.57).
STEREO
TUNED
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
VOL.
01:FM98.50MHz
SBL SBR
Preset number
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
02:Empty
SBL SBR
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
STEREO
VOL.
TUNED
SW
C
LR
SL SR
SBL SBR
01:FM98.50MHz
PRESET
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
MEMORY
PRESET
TUNER
Numeric keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 55
Radio Data System tuning
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM
stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of
Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program
Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio
Data System broadcasting station.
■ Displaying the Radio Data System
information
1
Tune into the desired Radio Data System
broadcasting station.
• We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System
broadcasting stations (p.57).
2
Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
• “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not
displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System
service.
■ Receiving traffic information
automatically
When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit
automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function,
follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station.
1
When “TUNER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program”
(TrafficProgram) and press ENTER.
The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds.
Press ENTER again to start the search immediately.
• To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor
keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed.
• To cancel the search, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the
search finishes.
• “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information
stations are found.
Program Service Program service name
Program Type Current program type
Radio Text Information on the current program
Clock Time Current time
DSP Program Sound mode name
Audio Decoder Decoder name
Frequency Frequency
STEREO
VOL.
TUNED
SW
C
LR
SL SR
SBL SBR
ProgramType
INFO
Item name
STEREO
VOL.
TUNED
SW
C
LR
SL SR
SBL SBR
CLASSICS
9850
Information
STEREO
VOL.
TUNED
SW
C
LR
SL SR
SBL SBR
TPFM101.30MHz
FINISH
Traffic information station (frequency)
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
INFO
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 56
Operating the radio on the TV
You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the
TV.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
■ Playback screen
1 Radio station information
Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected
band (FM/AM) and frequency.
(U.K. and Europe models only)
When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.55), the
Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,”
“Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed.
2 Band icon
(Except for U.K. and Europe models)
Select this icon and press ENTER to switch between FM and AM.
3 TUNED/STEREO indicators
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.
4 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
2
1
3
4
Menu Submenu Function
Manual Tuning
FM
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Switches to FM/AM.
AM
Tuning (+/-) Selects a frequency.
Auto (+/-) Selects a radio station automatically.
Memory
Registers the selected station as
presets.
Direct Enters a frequency directly.
Browse
Moves to the browse screen (preset
station list).
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
ENTER
TUNER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 57
■ Browse screen
1 Preset station list
Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys to select a preset
station and press ENTER to tune into it.
2 Preset number
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
• (U.K. and Europe models only)
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto
Preset”.
Menu Submenu Function
Utility
Memory
Registers the current station to the
preset number selected in the list.
Auto Preset
Automatically registers FM radio
stations with strong signals (up to 40
stations).
Clear Preset
Clear the preset station selected in the
list.
Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations.
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the
list.
1 Page Down
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.
3
2
1
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 58
You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable
supplied with the iPod.
• An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible,
depending on the model or software version of the iPod.
• To play back iPod videos on the unit, an Apple Composite AV Cable (not supplied)
is required. Connect the USB and composite video plugs of the Apple Composite
AV cable to the USB jack and VIDEO jack on the front panel. To select a video,
operate the iPod itself in the simple play mode (p.60).
Connecting an iPod
Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the
iPod.
1
Connect the USB cable to the iPod.
2
Connect the USB cable to the USB jack.
• The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby
mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If
“Network Standby” (p.98) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to change
without limit.
• Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use.
Playing back iPod music
Supported iPod (as of February 2013)
• iPod touch (1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th generation)
• iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th generation)
• iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone
• iPad (3rd generation), iPad 2, iPad
RADIO
STRAIGHT
VIDEO
HDMI/
5V 2.1A
VIDEO
VOLUME
AUX
MHL 5V 1A
The unit (front)
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SL SR
SBL SBR
Connected
USB
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 59
Playback of iPod content
Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start
playback.
You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
1
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed.
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the
simple play mode (p.60).
■ Browse screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.61) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 List name
3 Contents list
Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and
press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu Function
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
5
3
2
4
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
ENTER
RETURN
USB
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 60
■ Playback screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.61) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining
time.
Use the cursor keys to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
• You can also use the external device operation keys on the remote control to
control playback.
■ Operating the iPod itself or remote control
(simple play)
1
Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode.
The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are
enabled.
To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again.
2
Operate your iPod itself or the remote control to
start playback.
Menu Submenu Function
Play Control
a Resumes playback from pause.
s Stops playback.
d Stops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
h
Searches forward/backward (by holding
down).
j
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.
1
3
2
Operational remote control
keys
Function
Cursor keys Select an item.
ENTER Confirms the selection.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen.
External device
operation keys
a
Starts playback or stops playback
temporarily.
d
s Stops playback.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
h
Searches forward/backward (by holding
down).
j
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
LT
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
MODE
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 61
■ Repeat/shuffle settings
You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings of your iPod.
• During simple play, configure the repeat/shuffle settings directly on your iPod or
press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below.
1
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Item Setting Function
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
Songs (Songs)
Plays back songs in random order. “x”
appears in the TV screen.
Albums
(Albums)
Plays back albums in random order. “x”
appears in the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears in the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs repeatedly. “v”
appears in the TV screen.
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
MODE
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 62
You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on
the unit. Refer to the instruction manuals for the USB storage
device for more information.
The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or
FAT32 format).
• The unit supports WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC
files (1- or 2-channel audio only).
• The unit is compatible with sampling rate of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC
files, and 48 kHz for other files.
• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer
of the USB storage device.
• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.
Connecting a USB storage device
1
Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.
• If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In
this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display.
• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.
• Disconnect the USB storage device from the USB jack when it is not in use.
• You cannot connect the PC to the USB jack of the unit.
Playback of USB storage device contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device
contents and start playback.
You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed
on the TV screen.
1
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is
displayed.
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
RADIO
STRAIGHT
VIDEO
HDMI/
5V 2.1A
VIDEO
AUX
MHL 5V 1A
The unit (front)
USB storage device
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SL SR
SBL SBR
Connected
USB
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
USB
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 63
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.
■ Browse screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.64) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 List name
3 Contents list
Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys to
select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu Function
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
5
3
2
4
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 64
■ Playback screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.64) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on
the remote control to control playback.
■ Repeat/shuffle settings
You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for playback of USB
storage device contents.
1
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Menu Submenu Function
Play Control
a Resumes playback from pause.
s Stops playback.
d Stops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.
1
3
2
Item Setting Function
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order. “x” appears on
the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the
TV screen.
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
LT
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 65
You can play back music files stored on your PC or
DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.
• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router
(p.33). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address)
are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.104) in the “Information” menu.
• The unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC
and FLAC files (1- or 2-channel audio only).
• The unit is compatible with sampling rates of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC
files, and 48 kHz for other files.
• To play back FLAC files, you need to install server software that supports sharing
of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.
Media sharing setup
To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible
NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each
music server.
■ For a PC with Windows Media Player
installed
1
Check that Windows Media Player 11 or later is
installed on your PC.
2
In the media sharing settings, enable media sharing
and allow media to be shared with the device.
■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server
software installed
Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and
configure the media sharing settings.
Playback of PC music contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and
start playback.
You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV
screen.
1
Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the
input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the
playback screen is displayed.
2
Use the cursor keys to select a music server and
press ENTER.
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
ENTER
NET
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 66
3
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.
■ Browse screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.67) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 List name
3 Contents list
Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and
press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu Function
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
5
3
2
4
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 67
■ Playback screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.67) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on
the remote control to control playback.
• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.83).
■ Repeat/shuffle settings
You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for the playback of PC
music content.
1
When “SERVER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Menu Submenu Function
Play Control
a Resumes playback from pause.
s Stops playback.
d Stops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation
keys to redisplay it.
1
3
2
Item Setting Function
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order. “x” appears on
the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the
TV screen.
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
LT
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 68
You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.
You can control the Internet radio with the menu displayed on the
TV screen.
• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.33). You can
check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly
assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.104) in the “Information” menu.
• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.
• The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service.
• This service may be discontinued without notice.
1
Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the
input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and
the playback screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
Listening to Internet radio
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
ENTER
RETURN
NET
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 69
■ Browse screen
1 Playback indicator
2 List name
3 Contents list
Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
• You can register your favorite Internet radio stations to the “Bookmarks” folder by
selecting “NET RADIO” as the input source on the unit and then accessing the
following website with the web browser on your PC. To use this feature, you need
the vTuner ID of the unit and your e-mail address to create your personal account.
You can check the vTunerID (MAC address of the unit) in “Network” (p.104) in the
“Information” menu.
http://yradio.vtuner.com/
■ Playback screen
1 Playback indicator
2 Playback information
Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
• You can also use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to
stop playback.
• Some information may not be available depending on the station.
Menu Function
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
5
3
2
4
Menu Submenu Function
Play Control s Stops playback.
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.
1
3
2
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
LT
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) En 70
The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on
the unit via network.
• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same
router (p.33). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP
address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.104) in the “Information”
menu.
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents
Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music
contents on the unit.
1
Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or
display the playback screen on the iPod.
If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon
( ) appears.
• If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are
connected to the router properly.
2
On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and
select the unit (network name of the unit) as the
audio output device.
3
Select a song and start playback.
The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and
starts playback.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
Supported iTunes/iPod (as of February 2013)
• iTunes 10.2.2 or later (Windows/Mac)
• iPod touch, iPhone or iPad with iOS 4.3.3 or later
PC
iTunes
Router
Playback starts
iPod
Starts playback
on iTunes
or iPod
The unit
iTunes (example) iPod (example)
iTunes (example) iPod (example)
Network name of the unit
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) En 71
• The playback screen is available only when your TV is connected to the unit via
HDMI.
• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by
setting “Network Standby” (p.98) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on
iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.99) in the “Setup” menu.
• If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the
iTunes/iPod stops automatically.
• You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable
volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.83) in the “Input” menu
to “Off”.
■ Playback screen
1 Playback indicator
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining
time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on
the remote control to control playback.
• To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to
configure the iTu nes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers
in advance.
Caution
• When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be
unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the
volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod
immediately.
1
3
2
Menu Submenu Function
Play Control
a Resumes playback from pause.
d Stops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation
keys to redisplay it.
iTunes (example of English version)
Check this box
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
LT
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 72
The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input
sources in the room where the unit is installed (Main zone) and in
another room (Zone2).
For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (Main
zone), another person can listen to radio in the study room (Zone2).
• Analog audio sources (including FM/AM radio), and USB and network sources
can be output to Zone2. To listen to the playback of an external device in Zone2,
you need to connect the device to the AUDIO jacks (AV 5–6 or AUDIO 1–2 jacks)
of the unit.
• (RX-V775 only)
The party mode (p.76) allows you to play back the same audio output in Main zone
as Zone2, whatever the input audio signal type.
Preparing Zone2
Connect the device that will be used in Zone2 to the unit. The
connection method varies depending on the amplifier being used
(the unit or an external amplifier).
Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
Living room (Main zone)
Study room (Zone2)
Caution
• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting
speakers or an external amplifier.
• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or
come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit
or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will
appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 73
■ Using the unit’s internal amplifier
Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to the unit with speaker
cables.
To utilize the EXTRA SP terminals for Zone2 speakers, set “Power
Amp Assign” (p.91) in the “Setup” menu to “7ch +1ZONE” after
connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet.
• When Zone2 output is enabled (p.75), the surround back speakers in the main
zone do not output sound.
■ Using an external amplifier
Connect the external amplifier (with volume control) placed in
Zone2 to the unit with a stereo pin cable.
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SPEAKERS
ZONE2/F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
12
3
45
76
9
The unit (rear)
Main zone
Zone2
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
P
TICAL
P
TICAL
O
AXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
Y
P
R
C
O
VIDEO
MONITO
R
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6
AV OUT
ZONE OUT
F
ZONE 2
NETWORKDC OUT
5V
0.5A
(
NET
)
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(
RADIO
)
L
R
AUDIO
L
R
12
3
45
76
9
QW
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
The unit (rear)
ZONE2 OUT jacks
Zone2
Main zone
External amplifier
Audio input
(analog stereo)
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 74
■ Operating the unit from Zone2
(remote connection)
You can operate the unit and external devices from Zone2 using the
supplied remote control if you connect an infrared signal
receiver/emitter to the unit’s REMOTE IN/OUT jacks.
• To operate external devices with the supplied remote control, you must register a
remote control code for each device before using (p.108).
Remote connections between Yamaha products
An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using
Yamaha products that support remote connections, as the unit
does. You can transmit remote control signals by connecting the
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an
infrared signal receiver.
AUDI O 1
AUDI O 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
Y
P
R
12
ARC
ANTENNA
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6
AV OUT
NETWORKDC OUT
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
5V
0.5A
(
NET
)
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(
RADIO
)
REMOTE
IN
OUT
The unit (rear)
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
Infrared signal
transmitter
External device
(such as a CD player)
Remote control
Infrared signal
receiver
Zone2
Main zone
REMOTE
IN
OUT
REMOTE
IN
OUT
Remote control
Infrared signal
receiver
Yamaha products
(up to six, including the unit)
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
Zone2
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 75
Controlling Zone2
1
Set MAIN/ZONE2 to “ZONE2”.
2
Press RECEIVER z.
Each time you press the key, Zone2 output is enabled or
disabled.
When Zone2 output is enabled, “ZONE2” lights up in the
front display.
3
Use the following keys to select an input source.
AV 5–6: AV 5–6 (AUDIO) jacks
AUDIO 1–2: AUDIO 1–2 jacks
TUNER: FM/AM radio
USB: USB jack (on the front panel)
NET: NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a desired
network source)
PHONO: PHONO jacks (RX-V775 only [except for U.S.A.
and Canada models])
• You cannot select USB and network sources exclusively for each zone. For
example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected for the
main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to “SERVER”.
4
Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.
• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.53)
• Playing back iPod music (p.58)
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
(p.62)
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.65)
• Listening to Internet radio (p.68)
• Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
(p.70)
• The on-screen operations are not available for Zone2. Use the front display
to control Zone2.
• AirPlay is available in Zone2 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in the
main zone.
• To set the sleep timer (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off), press SLEEP
repeatedly. The Zone2 output will be disabled after a specified period of
time.
• To adjust the Zone2 volume, press VOLUME or MUTE (when using the
unit’s internal amplifier). When using an external amplifier, use the volume
control on it.
Caution
• To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2.
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
PR
OG
RAM
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
M
USI
C
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
SLEEP
VOLUME
MUTE
AV 5–6
AUDIO 1–2
TUNER
USB
NET
MAIN/ZONE2
RECEIVER z
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 76
■ Enjoying the same source in multiple
rooms (party mode)
(RX-V775 only)
The party mode allows you to play back in Zone2 the same music
that is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode,
stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this
function when you want to use main zone music as background
music for a house party.
1
Press PARTY.
Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or
off.
When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the
front display.
• If the party mode does not work on Zone2, set “Party Mode Set” (p.100) in
the “Setup” menu to “Enable” (default).
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
H
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
PARTY
PLAYBACK ➤ Viewing the current status En 77
Switching information on the front display
1
Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed
item can also be applied separately to each input source group.
* The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio
decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears.
Viewing the status information on the TV
1
Press DISPLAY.
The following information is displayed on the TV.
* RX-V775 only
2
To close the information display, press DISPLAY.
Viewing the current status
Input source group Item
HDMI 1–5
V-AUX
AV 1–6
AUDIO 1–2
Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound
mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
TUNER
Frequency (frequency), DSP Program (sound mode
name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
* (U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is
tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.55).
USB
SERVER
AirPlay
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*)
* During simple playback of iPod:
Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode
name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
AudioDecoder
Item name
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
ProLogic
Information
NET RADIO
Song (song title), Album (album name), Station
(station name), DSP Program (sound mode name),
Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
PHONO
(RX-V775 only [except for U.S.A. and Canada
models])
Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound
mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
Input source group Item
Input source/
Party mode
status*
Audio format/
Decoder
Compressed Music Enhancer status
CINEMA DSP status
Sound
mode
Volume
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
INFO
DISPLAY
PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 78
You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This
menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily
configure settings during playback.
1
Press OPTION.
Front display
TV screen
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Option menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SL SR
SBL SBR
ToneControl
OPTION
Item Function Page
Tone Control
(Tone Control)
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency
range of sounds.
79
Adaptive DRC
(Adaptive DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to
minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume
is adjusted.
79
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
(CINEMA DSP 3D)
Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 79
Dialogue Adjust
(Dialog Adjust)
Dialogue Level
(Dialog Lvl)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. 79
Dialogue Lift
(Dialog Lift)
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. 79
Extended Surround
(EXTD Surround)
Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources
when surround back speakers are used.
80
Volume Trim
(Volume Trim)
Input Trim
(In.Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources. 80
Subwoofer
Trim (SW.Trim)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. 80
Enhancer
(Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 80
Video Mode
(Video Mode)
Enables/disables the video signal processing
settings configured in the “Setup” menu.
80
FM Mode
(FM Mode)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio
reception.
80
Traffic Program
(TrafficProgram)
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Automatically searches for a traffic information
station.
55
Repeat
(Repeat)
Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.61),
USB storage device (p.64), or media server (p.67).
—
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.61),
USB storage device (p.64), or media server (p.67).
—
PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 79
■ Tone Control (Tone Control)
Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds.
Choices
Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)
Setting range
-6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass) to +6.0 dB, *0.5 dB increments
Default
Bypass (Bypass)
• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.
Adjusting with the front panel controls
a Press TONE CONTROL to select “Treble” or “Bass”.
b Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
■ Adaptive DRC (Adaptive DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted
when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to
playback at a low volume at night.
Settings
If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a
high volume.
■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (CINEMA DSP 3D)
Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.48). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP
3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo).
Settings
■ Dialogue Adjust (Dialog Adjust)
Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds.
❑ Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard clearly, you
can turn up its volume by increasing this setting.
Setting range
0 to 3
Default
0
❑ Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is coming
from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing this setting.
• This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.
– One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) is selected when presence speakers
are used.
– Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.48) is working.
(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)
Setting range
0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)
Default
0
On (On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range.
Off (Off) (default) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.
Volume: low Volume: high
Input level Input level
On
Off
On
Off
Output level
Output level
On (On) (default) Enables CINEMA DSP 3D.
Off (Off) Disables CINEMA DSP 3D.
Ideal position
PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 80
■ Extended Surround (EXTD Surround)
Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers
are used.
Settings
• Some early Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS-ES sources do not contain a flag for reproducing surround
back channel. We recommend you set “Extended Surround” to “bPLIIx Movie” or “EX/ES” when playing
back those sources.
■ Volume Trim (Volume Trim)
Fine-adjusts volume difference between input sources or subwoofer volume.
❑ Input Trim (In.Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume
differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB
❑ Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB
■ Enhancer (Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.52).
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer
(p.52).
Settings
Default
TUNER, USB, (network sources): On (On)
Others: Off (Off)
■ Video Mode (Video Mode)
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio) settings
configured in “Processing” (p.95) in the “Setup” menu.
Settings
■ FM Mode (FM Mode)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.
Settings
Auto (Auto)
(default)
Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if signals that contain
surround back channel signals are input, and reproduces the signals
in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. If two surround back speakers are connected,
the unit reproduces the 5.1-channel signals in 7.1-channel.
bPLIIx Movie
(bPLIIxMo)
Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic
IIx Movie decoder. This setting is available only when two surround
back speakers are connected.
bPLIIx Music
(bPLIIxMu)
Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro
Logic IIx Music decoder. This setting is available only when one or two
surround back speakers are connected.
EX/ES (EX/ES)
Automatically selects the Dolby EX or DTS-ES decoder, and
reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel.
Off (Off)
Always reproduces signals in their original channels. (Even when
DTS-ES or Dolby Digital Surround EX signal is input, the unit
reproduces the signal in 5.1-channel.)
Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.
Processing
(Processing)
Enables the video signal processing.
Direct (Direct)
(default)
Disables the video signal processing.
Stereo (Stereo)
(default)
Receives FM radio in stereo sounds.
Mono (Mono) Receives FM radio in monaural sounds.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring input sources (Input menu) En 81
CONFIGURATIONS
You can change the input source settings using the TV screen.
1
Press ON SCREEN.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured
and press the cursor key (q).
The input source of the unit also changes.
• You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
5
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Input menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
Configuring input sources (Input menu)
Item Function Page
Rename/Icon Select Changes the input source name and icon. 82
Audio In
Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an
audio jack of others.
82
Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS. 82
Volume Interlock
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via
AirPlay.
83
Video Out Selects a video to be output with the audio input source. 83
DMC Control
Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media
Controller (DMC) to control playback.
83
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring input sources (Input menu) En 82
■ Rename/Icon Select
Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
Input sources
HDMI 1–5, V-AUX, AV 1–6, AUDIO 1–2, USB, PHONO*
* RX-V775 only (except for U.S.A. and Canada models)
■ Setup procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a template and press the cursor key (w).
• You cannot change the template or icon for “USB” when an iPod is connected.
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).
3
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
4
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
5
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Audio In
Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an audio jack of others. For
example, use this function in the following cases.
• Connecting a playback device that supports HDMI video output, but not HDMI audio
output
• Connecting a playback device that has component video jacks and analog stereo
jacks (such as game consoles)
Input sources
HDMI 1–5, AV 1–2
■ Setup procedure
(To input audio through a digital optical jack)
Select “AV1” or “AV4” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks
with a digital optical cable.
(To input audio through a digital coaxial jack)
Select “AV2” or “AV3” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks
with a digital coaxial cable.
(To input audio through analog audio jacks)
Select “AV5”, “AV6”, “AUDIO1”, or “AUDIO2”, and connect the device to the unit’s
corresponding audio jacks with a stereo pin cable.
■ Decoder Mode
Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”.
For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder
Mode” to “DTS”.
Input sources
HDMI 1–5, V-AUX, AV 1–4
Settings
Auto (default) Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal.
DTS Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.)
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 83
■ Volume Interlock
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.
Input sources
AirPlay
Settings
■ Video Out
Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.
Input sources
TUNER, (network sources)
Settings
■ DMC Control
Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback.
Input source
SERVER
Settings
• A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network.
When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media
Player 12) on the same network.
You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.46) using the TV screen.
1
Press ON SCREEN.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and
press the cursor key (q).
• You can still switch the scene by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
Off Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.
Limited (default)
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range
(-80 dB to 0 dB and mute).
Full
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to
+16.5 dB and mute).
Off (default) Does not output video.
HDMI 1–5, AV 1–6,
V-AUX
Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.
Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback.
Enable (default) Allows DMCs to control playback.
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 84
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Scene menu items
■ Save
Registers the unit’s current settings (input source, sound program/surround decoder,
Compressed Music Enhancer on/off, and HDMI output jack [RX-V775 only]) in the
selected scene.
• If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device
assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.46).
■ Load
Loads the settings registered for the selected scene.
Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene
assignments.
❑ Device Control
Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected to
the unit via HDMI. (SCENE link playback)
Settings
Default
SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control
SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO): Off
• To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set “HDMI
Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.127).
❑ Detail
Displays the assignments of the selected scene.
Item Function Page
Save Registers the current settings in the selected scene. 84
Load
Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can
also configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the
scene assignments.
84
Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon. 85
Reset Restores the default settings for the selected scene. 85
Off Disables the SCENE link playback function.
HDMI Control
Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this
if an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is
connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports
HDMI Control.
Input Input source to be used
HDMI Output
(RX-V775 only)
HDMI OUT jack to be used
Mode Sound program/surround decoder to be used
Enhancer Compressed Music Enhancer on/off
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 85
■ Rename/Icon Select
Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
■ Setup procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).
2
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
3
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
5
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Reset
Restores the default settings (p.46) for the selected scene.
You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the
TV screen.
1
Press ON SCREEN.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be
configured and press the cursor key (q).
• You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
Configuring sound programs/surround
decoders (Sound Program menu)
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 86
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
5
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Sound Program menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder.
■ Settings for sound programs
Item Function Settings
Decode Type
Selects a surround decoder to be used
in combination with the selected sound
program.
bPro Logic*, bPLIIx Movie
(bPLII Movie), bPLIIx
Music* (bPLII Music*),
bPLIIx Game* (bPLII
Game*), Neo:6 Cinema,
Neo:6 Music*
(* Available only when
“SURROUND DECODER” is
selected)
DSP Level Adjusts the sound field effect level.
-6 dB to +3 dB (default: 0 dB)
Higher to enhance the sound
field effect, and lower to
reduce it.
Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and presence sound field
generation.
1 ms to 99 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Surround Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and surround sound field
generation.
1ms to 49ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Surround Back Initial
Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and surround back sound field
generation.
Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
presence sound field.
0.1 to 2.0
Higher to enhance the
broadening effect, and lower
to reduce it.
Surround Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
surround sound field.
Surround Back Room
Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
surround back sound field.
Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the presence sound
field.
0 to 10
Higher to enhance the
reflectivity, and lower to
reduce it.
Surround Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the surround sound
field.
Surround Back
Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the surround back
sound field.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 87
The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo”.
• Available items in “7ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used.
■ Settings for decoders
The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “Surround Decoder”
to “bPLIIx Music” or “Neo:6 Music”.
Reverb Time
Adjust the decay time of the rear
reverberant sound.
1.0 s to 5.0 s
Higher to enrich the
reverberant sound and lower
to have clear sound.
Reverb Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and reverberant sound
generation.
0 ms to 250 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Reverb Level
Adjusts the volume of the reverberant
sound.
0% to 100%
Higher to strengthen the
reverberant sound, and lower
to weaken it.
Sound program
Item Function Settings
2ch Stereo Direct
Selects whether to
automatically bypass the
DSP circuit when an
analog audio source is
played back.
Auto (default), Off
7ch Stereo
Level Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to +5 (default: 0)
Front / Rear Balance
Adjusts the front and rear
volume balance.
-5 to +5 (default: 0)
Higher to enhance the front
side, and lower to enhance
the rear side.
Left / Right Balance
Adjusts the right and left
volume balance.
-5 to +5 (default: 0)
Higher to enhance the right
side, and lower to enhance
the left side.
Height Balance
Adjust the height volume
balance using the
presence speakers.
0 to 10 (default: 5)
Higher to enhance the
upside, and lower to
enhance the downside. (The
presence speakers do not
produce sounds when
“Height Balance” is set to
“0”.)
Monaural Mix
Enables/disables
monaural sound output.
Off (default), On
Item Function Settings
Decode Type Item Function Settings
bPLIIx Music
Panorama
Adjusts the broadening
effect of the front sound
field.
Off (default), On
Select “On” to wrap front right/left
channel sounds around the field
and generate a spacious sound
field in combination with the
surround sound field.
Center Width
Adjusts the broadening
effect of the center
sound field.
0 to 7 (default: 3)
Higher to enhance the broadening
effect, and lower to reduce it
(closer to center).
Dimension
Adjusts the difference in
level between the front
and surround sound
fields.
-3 to +3 (default: 0)
Higher to strengthen the front
sound field and lower to strengthen
the surround sound field.
Neo:6 Music Center Image
Adjusts the center
orientation level
(broadening effect) of
the front sound field.
0.0 to 1.0 (default: 0.3)
Higher to strengthen the center
orientation level (less broadening
effect) and lower to weaken (more
broadening effect).
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 88
You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
1
Press ON SCREEN.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
5
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 89
Setup menu items
Menu Item Function Page
Speaker
Auto Setup Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO). 37
Manual Setup
Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. 91
Configuration
Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 91
Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 91
Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 91
Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. 92
Front Presence Selects whether or not presence speakers are connected. 92
Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase. 92
Extra Bass Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components. 92
Bass Cross Over Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component that can be output from speakers whose size is set to “Small”. 92
Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 93
Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 93
Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 93
Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 94
Sound
Lipsync
Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. 94
Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 94
Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 94
Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 94
Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 95
Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 95
Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level when the volume is adjusted. 95
Video Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio). 95
HDMI
HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input). 96
Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 97
Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 97
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 90
Network
IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 98
Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 98
MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 98
Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 99
Multi Zone
Main Zone Set Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the TV screen. 99
Zone2 Set
Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone. 100
Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. 100
Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the TV screen. 100
Party Mode Set
(RX-V775 only)
Enables/disables switching to the party mode.
100
Function
Display Set
Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 100
Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated. 100
Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. 101
Trigger Output
Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. 101
Target Zone Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. 101
DC OUT Power Mode Selects how to supply power through the DC OUT jack. 101
Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 102
ECO
Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 102
ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 102
Language Select an on-screen menu language. 103
Menu Item Function Page
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 91
Speaker (Manual Setup)
Configures the speaker settings manually.
■ Power Amp Assign
Selects a speaker system.
In addition to the 5.1- or 7.1-channel speaker system, various speaker configurations
are possible using the presence speakers, Zone2 speakers, or bi-amp connection.
Settings
■ Configuration
Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.
• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm
(6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”).
❑ Front
Selects the size of the front speakers.
Settings
• “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”.
❑ Center
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
Settings
❑ Surround
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.
Settings
Basic (default)
Select this option when you use a normal speaker system (not using
Zone2 speakers or a bi-amp connection).
7ch +1ZONE
Select this option when you use Zone2 speakers (p.73) in addition to
the speaker system in the main zone.
5ch BI-AMP
Select this option when you connect front speakers that support
bi-amp connections (p.21).
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency
components.
Small (default)
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components
(configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency
components.
Small (default)
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).
None
Select this option when no center speaker is connected.
The front speakers will produce center channel audio.
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel
frequency components.
Small (default)
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).
None
Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.
The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual
CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 92
❑ Surround Back
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.
Settings
• This setting is not available when “Power Amp Assign” is set to “5ch BI-AMP”, or when “Surround” is set to
“None”.
❑ Front Presence
Selects whether or not presence speakers are connected.
Settings
❑ Subwoofer
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase.
Settings
• When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.
❑ Extra Bass
Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components.
Settings
• This setting is not available when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”, or when “Front” is set to “Small”.
❑ Bass Cross Over
Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a speaker
whose size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified value will be
produced from the subwoofer or front speakers
Settings
40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz (default), 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz
• If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and
crossover frequency to maximum.
Large x1
Select this option when one large speaker is connected.
The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.
Large x2
Select this option when two large speakers are connected.
The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.
Small x1
Select this option when one small speaker is connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).
Small x2 (default)
Select this option when two small speakers are connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).
None
Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.
The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio.
Use (default) Select this option when presence speakers are connected.
None Select this option when no presence speakers are connected.
Use
Normal
(default)
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase not
reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect)
channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels.
Reverse
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase reversed).
The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio
and low-frequency components from other channels.
None
Select this option when no subwoofer is connected. The front
speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and
low-frequency components from other channels.
Off (default)
Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the subwoofer or
front speakers produce the front channel low-frequency components.
On
Both the front speakers and subwoofer produce the front channel
low-frequency components.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 93
■ Distance
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the
speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance
from “Meter” or “Feet”.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,
Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer
Setting range
0.30 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft), *0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments
Default
3.00 m (10.0 ft)
■ Level
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,
Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer
Setting range
-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB
■ Parametric EQ
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
Settings
• “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto
Setup” have already been saved (p.37). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results.
■ Manual equalizer adjustment
1
Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER.
2
Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.
3
Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.
• To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”.
• To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.37) to the “Manual” fields for
fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type.
4
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands
and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Setting range
Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB
5
To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER
repeatedly to select an item.
Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected
band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and
the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Setting range
Center frequency: 31.3 HZ to 16.0 kHz
Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Manual
Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.
For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.
YPAO:Flat Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.
YPAO:Front
Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as
the front speakers.
YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.
Through Does not use the equalizer.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 94
■ Test Tone
Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker
balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.
Settings
Sound
Configures the audio output settings.
■ Lipsync
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.
❑ Delay Enable
Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.
Choices
HDMI 1–5, AV 1–6, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–2
Settings
❑ Auto/Manual Select
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
Setting range
• Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on the TV
connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”.
❑ Adjustment
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual
Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when
“Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”.
Setting range
0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)
Default
0 ms
• “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and fine adjustment.
■ Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and
DTS signals) playback.
Settings
Off (default) Does not output test tones.
On
Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance
or equalizer.
Disable Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
Enable (default) Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
Auto (default)
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when
a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the
unit via HDMI.
If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in
“Adjustment”.
Manual
Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video
and audio output manually.
Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
Maximum (default) Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.
Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.
Minimum/Auto
Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low
volumes.
When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is
automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 95
■ Max Volume
Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB
Default
+16.5 dB
■ Initial Volume
Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.
Settings
■ Adaptive DSP Level
Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level when the volume
is adjusted.
Settings
Video
Configures the video output settings.
■ Video Mode
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio).
Settings
• When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to
reduce video output delay.
• When “Video Mode” is set to “Processing” and the resolution is being converted, short messages are not
displayed on the TV screen.
❑ Resolution
Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to
“Processing”.
Settings
• If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MON.CHK” (p.106) in the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be displayed on
your TV normally.)
Off (default)
Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered
standby mode.
On
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB
increments).
(This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max
Volume”.)
Off Does not adjust the effect level automatically.
On (default) Adjusts the effect level automatically.
Direct (default) Disables the video signal processing.
Processing
Enables the video signal processing.
Select a resolution and an aspect ratio in “Resolution” and “Aspect”.
Through Does not convert the resolution.
Auto (default) Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.
480p/576p, 720p,
1080i, 1080p, 4K
Output video signals with a selected resolution.
(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 96
❑ Aspect
Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to
“Processing”.
Settings
• This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or
2160p (4K) signals.
HDMI
Configures the HDMI settings.
■ HDMI Control
Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.127).
Settings
• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.127) after connecting HDMI
Control-compatible devices.
❑ TV Audio Input
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI
Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when
the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.
Settings
AV 1–6, AUDIO 1–2
Default
AV 4
• When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting
an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.
Through (default) Does not convert the aspect ratio.
16:9 Normal
Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side
of the screen.
Off (default) Disables HDMI Control.
On
Enables HDMI Control.
Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby
Sync”.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 97
❑ ARC
Enables/disables ARC (p.23) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
• You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected
to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to
“Off” and use the TV’s speakers.
❑ Standby Sync
Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit
when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
■ Audio Output
Selects a device to output audio.
• This setting (except for “HDMI OUT2” [RX-V775 only]) is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
❑ Amp
Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers connected to the unit.
Settings
❑ HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2 (RX-V775 only)
HDMI OUT (RX-V675 only)
Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack.
Settings
■ Standby Through
Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the
unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On”, you can use the input selection
keys (HDMI 1–5, V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby mode
(the standby indicator on the unit blinks).
Settings
• This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
Off Disables ARC.
On (default) Enables ARC.
Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
Auto (default)
Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the
unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.
Off Disables the audio output from the speakers.
On (default) Enables the audio output from the speakers.
Off (default) Disables the audio output from the TV.
On Enables the audio output from the TV.
Off (default) Does not output videos/audio to the TV.
On
Outputs videos/audio to the TV.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 98
Network
Configures the network settings.
■ IP Address
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).
❑ DHCP
Select whether to use a DHCP server.
Settings
■ Manual network settings
1
Set “DHCP” to “Off”.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to
select a value.
4
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
5
To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4.
6
To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
7
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Network Standby
Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network
standby).
Settings
■ MAC Address Filter
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.
❑ Filter
Enables/disables the MAC address filter.
Settings
❑ MAC Address 1–10
Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted
access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.
■ Procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1–5” or “MAC Address 6–10”
and press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to
select a value.
4
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
5
To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Off
Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters
manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”.
On (default)
Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network
parameters (such as IP address).
IP Address Specifies an IP address.
Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask.
Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.
DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.
DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
Off (default) Disables the network standby function.
On
Enables the network standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Off (default) Disables the MAC address filter.
On
Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the
MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access
to the unit.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 99
■ Network Name
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network
devices.
■ Procedure
1
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Multi Zone
Configures the multi zone settings.
■ Main Zone Set
Configures the main zone setting.
❑ Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the TV screen.
■ Procedure
1
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 100
■ Zone2 Set
Configures the Zone2 settings.
❑ Max Volume
Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB
Default
+16.5 dB
• This setting is available only when “Power Amp Assign” (p.91) is set to “7ch +1ZONE”.
❑ Initial Volume
Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
Settings
• This setting is available only when “Power Amp Assign” (p.91) is set to “7ch +1ZONE”.
❑ Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the TV screen.
You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone
Set” (p.99).
■ Party Mode Set
(RX-V775 only)
Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.76).
Choice
Target: Zone 2
Settings
Function
Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.
■ Display Set
Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.
❑ Dimmer (Front Display)
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
Setting range
-4 to 0 (higher to brighten)
Default
0
• The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.102) is set to “On”.
❑ Short Message
Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated
(such as input selection and volume adjustment).
Settings
Off (default)
Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby
mode.
On
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB
increments).
(This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.)
Disable Disables switching to the party mode.
Enable (default)
Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party
mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control.
On (default) Displays short messages on the TV screen.
Off Does not display short messages on the TV screen.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 101
❑ Wallpaper
Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.
Settings
■ Trigger Output
Sets the TRIGGER OUT jack to function in sync with the power status of each zone or
input switching.
❑ Trigger Mode
Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.
Settings
Source
Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching
when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.
Choices
HDMI 1–5, AV 1–6, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–2, TUNER, PHONO*, (network sources), USB
* RX-V775 only (except for U.S.A. and Canada models)
Settings
Manual
Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger
Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of
the external device connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.
Choices
❑ Target Zone
Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.
Settings
■ DC OUT
Configures the DC OUT jack setting.
❑ Power Mode
Selects how to supply power to the Yamaha AV accessory connected to the DC OUT
jack.
Settings
Picture 1 (default),
Picture 2, Picture 3
Displays the selected image on the TV screen when there is no video
signal.
Gray
Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video
signal.
Power (default)
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the
zone specified with “Target Zone.”
Source
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in
the zone specified with “Target Zone.”
An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in
“Source.”
Manual
Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal
transmission with “Manual.”
Low
Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input
source specified in this option.
High (default)
Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source
specified in this option.
Low Stops the electronic signal transmission.
High (default) Transmits the electronic signal.
Main
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of the main zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.
Zone2
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.
All (default)
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of the main zone or Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone or Zone2.
Continuous (default)
Supplies power through the DC OUT jack continuously regardless of
the power state (on/standby) of the unit.
Main Zone Power
Sync.
Supplies power through the DC OUT jack only when the main zone is
turned on.
(This setting may not work properly on some accessories.)
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 102
■ Memory Guard
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
Settings
• When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.
ECO
Configures the power supply settings.
■ Auto Power Standby
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit for
the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby mode.
Settings
Default
U.K. and Europe models: 8 hours
Other models: Off
• Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the
front display.
■ ECO Mode
Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode.
When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption.
Settings
• The new setting will take effect after the unit is restarted.
• When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.
• If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.
Off (default) Does not protect the settings.
On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.
Icon
Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.
2 hours, 4 hours,
8 hours, 12 hours
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for
the specified time. For example, when “2 hours” is selected, the unit
will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.
Off (default) Disables the eco mode.
On Enables the eco mode.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) En 103
Language
Select an on-screen menu language.
Settings
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.
You can view information about the unit using the TV screen.
1
Press ON SCREEN.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
English (default) English
Japanese
French
German
Spanish
Russian
Italian
Chinese
Français
Deutsch
Español
Italiano
Viewing information about the unit
(Information menu)
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) En 104
Types of information
■ Audio Signal
Displays information about the current audio signal.
• Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the
specifications and settings of the playback device.
■ Video Signal
Displays information about the current video signal.
■ HDMI Monitor
Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.
• (RX-V775 only)
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”.
■ Network
Displays the network information on the unit.
■ System
Displays the system information on the unit.
• If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of
the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You
can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating
the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.113).
■ Multi Zone
Displays information about Zone2.
Input
Format Audio format of the input signal
Channel
The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE)
For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total
(3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE).
Sampling The number of samples per second of the input digital signal
Bitrate The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal
Dialogue The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal
Output The speaker terminals from which signals are output
HDMI Signal Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output
HDMI Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)
Analog Resolution
Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR OUT
jacks (analog)
Interface TV interface
Video Resolution Resolutions supported by the TV
IP Address IP address
Subnet Mask Subnet mask
Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway
DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server
DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server
MAC Address MAC address
Network Name Network name (the unit’s name on the network)
Status The connection status of the NETWORK jack
Remote ID The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.105)
TV Format The unit’s video signal type (p.106)
Speaker Impedance The speaker impedance setting of the unit (p.105)
Tuner Freq. Step
(Asia and General models only)
The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.106)
System ID System ID number
Firmware Version The version of firmware installed on the unit
Input The input source selected for Zone2
Volume The volume setting for Zone2
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 105
Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.
1
Set the unit to standby mode.
2
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE
z
.
3
Press PROGRAM to select an item.
4
Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.
5
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on
again.
The new settings take effect.
ADVANCED SETUP menu items
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.)
Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the
speakers connected.
Settings
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)
Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default:
ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a
unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.
Settings
ID1 (default), ID2
■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be
automatically canceled.
1
Press CODE SET on the remote control.
2
Press RECEIVER.
3
Use the numeric keys to enter “5019” (ID1) or “5020” (ID2).
Once the remote control ID is registered successfully, SOURCE blinks twice.
If it blinks six times, registration failed. Repeat from Step 1.
• The registered remote control codes (p.108) are not cleared even if you change the remote control ID.
Configuring the system settings
(ADVANCED SETUP menu)
Item Function Page
SP IMP. Changes the speaker impedance setting. 105
REMOTE ID Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 105
TU
(Asia and General models only)
Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.
106
TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type. 106
MON.CHK Removes the limitation on HDMI video output. 106
INIT Restores the default settings. 106
UPDATE Updates the firmware. 107
VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 107
MAIN ZONE z
STRAIGHTPROGRAM
6 Ω MIN
Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You
can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
8 Ω MIN (default)
Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the
unit.
SPIMP.8MIN
REMOTEIDID1
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 106
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU)
(Asia and General models only)
Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or
region.
Settings
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)
Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.
Settings
NTSC, PAL
Default
U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC
Other models: PAL
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output
(MON.CHK)
The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI
OUT jack.
Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution”
(p.95) when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a
different resolution than the detected resolution.
Settings
• Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV
after “MON.CHK” has been set to “SKIP”.
Restoring the default settings (INIT)
Restores the default settings for the unit.
Choices
FM100/AM10
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz
steps and AM by 10-kHz steps.
FM50/AM9 (default)
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps
and AM by 9-kHz steps.
TUFM50/AM9
TVFORMATNTSC
YES (default)
Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a
resolution supported by the TV only.)
SKIP
Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a
specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)
VIDEO Restores the default settings for video configurations.
ALL Restores the default settings for the unit.
CANCEL Does not perform an initialization.
MON.CHKYES
INITCANCEL
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 107
Updating the firmware (UPDATE)
New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be
released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from our website. If the unit is
connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details,
refer to the information supplied with updates.
■ Firmware update procedure
Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure
you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.
1
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to
start firmware update.
Choices
• If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after
ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in
“Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.113).
Checking the firmware version (VERSION)
Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
• You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.104) in the “Information” menu.
• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.
USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device.
NETWORK Update the firmware via the network.
UPDATEUSB
VERSIONxx.xx
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 108
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate external devices
(such as BD/DVD players) if you have registered the remote control
code of the external device.
• You cannot control an external device that does not have a remote control sensor.
• Ensure that the remote control ID of the external device is set to “ID1”. If any other
ID is selected, the remote control operations may not work properly.
• If the unit’s remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, the
registered codes may be cleared. If this happens, insert new batteries and register
the codes again.
• Under the unit’s default settings, the amplifier code (Yamaha: 5098) is set for all
the input selection keys. With this setting, you can control HDMI
Control-compatible devices connected to the unit with the remote control. (This
function may not work depending on the specification of the external device.)
Registering the remote control code for a TV
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate a TV if you have
registered its remote control code.
• You can also register your TV’s remote control code to the unit’s input selection
keys (p.109). This would allow you to use the cursor keys or numeric keys to
operate the TV (this function may not be available on some TV models).
• (RX-V775 [China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models] only)
You can also assign a function to each key using the learning function (p.110).
1
Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM
to find your TV’s remote control code.
• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list.
If that does not work, try the other codes.
2
Press CODE SET.
SOURCE blinks twice.
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 2.
3
Press TV z.
4
Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote
control code.
Once the remote control code is successfully registered, SOURCE
blinks twice.
If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2.
■ TV operations
Once you have registered the remote control code for your TV, you
can control it using the TV operation keys, regardless of the input
source selected on the unit.
Controlling external devices with the remote control
TV operation keys
INPUT Switches the video inputs of the TV.
MUTE Mutes the audio output of the TV.
TV VOL Adjust the volume of the TV.
TV CH Switch the channels of the TV
TV z Turns on/off the TV.
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
CODE SET
TV z
SOURCE
Numeric keys
TV operation keys
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 109
Registering the remote control codes for
playback devices
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate playback devices if
you have registered their remote control codes. You can also use
the input selection keys to change the playback devices that are
controlled by the remote control, because their remote control
codes are assigned to the input selection keys.
• (RX-V675 and RX-V775 [U.S.A. and Canada models] only)
If you assign the remote control code for an external device to the star (★) key, you
can operate the device with the remote control without switching the input source
after pressing the star key.
• (RX-V775 [China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models] only)
You can also assign a function to each key using the learning function (p.110).
1
Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM
to find the remote control code for your playback
device.
• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If
that does not work, try the other codes.
2
Press CODE SET.
SOURCE blinks twice.
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 2.
3
Press the input selection key.
For example, press HDMI 1 to set the remote control code
for the playback device connected to the HDMI 1 jack.
4
Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote
control code.
Once the remote control code is registered successfully, SOURCE
blinks twice.
If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2.
• For details on how to register a remote control code to a SCENE key, refer to
“Configuring scene assignments” (p.46).
■ Playback device operations
Once you have registered the remote control code for your
playback device, you can control it using the following keys after
selecting the input source or scene.
• By pressing SOURCE or RECEIVER, you can switch the devices (the unit or
external device) that are operated by the menu operation keys, DISPLAY and
numeric keys. You can operate the unit after pressing RECEIVER (lights up in
orange), and an external device after pressing SOURCE (lights up in green). For
example, if you register the remote control code of your external device on
TUNER, you can operate the unit’s built-in FM/AM radio after pressing RECEIVER
and the external device after pressing SOURCE.
• These keys work only if the corresponding function is available on your playback
device and if the device can be operated with an infrared remote control.
SOURCE z Turns on/off the playback device.
Menu operation
keys
Cursor keys Select an item.
ENTER Confirms a selected item.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen.
DISPLAY Switches information on the display.
External device
operation keys
TOP MENU Displays the top menu.
POP-UP/MENU Displays the pop-up menu.
s Stops playback.
d Stops playback temporarily.
a
Starts playback of the selected
song/video.
h
Searches forward/backward (by
holding down).
j
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
Numeric keys Enter numerical values.
TV operation keys Control the TV (p.108).
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SU
R. DE
COD
E
CODE SET
DISPLAY
SOURCE z
SOURCE
RECEIVER
Numeric keys
TV operation keys
Menu operation keys
External device
operation keys
Input selection keys
External device
operation keys
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 110
Programming from other remote controls
(learning)
(RX-V775 [China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models] only)
The remote control of the unit can receive remote control signals
from other remote controls and learn the remote control operation. If
you cannot find a remote control code for your playback device or if
any key on the remote control does not work after you register the
remote control code, use the learning function to assign a function
to each key.
1
Press CODE SET.
SOURCE blinks twice.
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
2
Press one of the following keys depending on the
type of your device.
For playback device: press the input selection key
(corresponding to the input jacks where the device is
connected).
For TV: press TV z.
3
Use the numeric keys to enter “9990”.
4
Aim the infrared transmitters of the remote controls
at each other.
5
Perform the following steps within 10 seconds.
a On this unit, press one of the following keys to which you want to
assign a function.
For playback device: SOURCE z, menu operations keys,
external device operation keys
For TV: TV operation keys
b On the external device, press the key from which the operation is
learned.
Once the operation is learned successfully, SOURCE blinks
twice.
If it blinks six times, learning has failed. Repeat Step 5.
6
Repeat step 5 until all desired operations are
learned.
7
Press CODE SET.
SOURCE blinks once.
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
123 4
12
12
3 4
Remote control of external device
5 to 10 cm apart
Note
• If you press RECEIVER in step 2, you can assign functions of an external
receiver to the menu operation keys, external device operation keys or
numeric keys. However, it makes these keys to control the unit impossible. If
you need to restore the remote control code for the unit, perform the following
steps.
a Press CODE SET.
b Press RECEIVER.
c Use the numeric keys to enter “9992”.
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
OUT
TUNE
R
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SCEN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
RECEIVE
R
H
DM
I
A
V
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
CODE SET
TV z
SOURCE z
SOURCE
TV operation keys
Menu operation keys
External device
operation keys
External device
operation keys
Numeric keys
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 111
Clearing functions learned from other
remote controls
(RX-V775 [China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models] only)
■ Clearing the assignment for each key
1
Press CODE SET.
SOURCE blinks twice.
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
2
Press one of the following keys to select the device
for which key assignments will be cleared.
For playback device: press the input selection key.
For TV: press TV z.
3
Use the numeric keys to enter “9991”.
4
Press the key that you want to reset.
Once the key assignment is cleared successfully, SOURCE
blinks twice.
If it blinks six times, clearing failed. Repeat from Step 2.
5
Repeat step 4 until all desired key assignments are
cleared.
6
Press CODE SET.
SOURCE blinks once.
■ Clearing the assignments for each input
source
1
Press CODE SET.
SOURCE blinks twice.
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
2
Press one of the following keys to select the device
for which key assignments will be cleared.
For playback device: press the input selection key.
For TV: press TV z.
3
Use the numeric keys to enter “9992”.
Once the key assignment is cleared successfully, SOURCE
blinks twice.
If it blinks six times, clearing failed. Repeat from Step 1.
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
RE
C
EIVE
R
SU
R. DE
COD
E
CODE SET
TV z
SOURCE
Numeric keys
Input selection keys
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 112
Resetting remote control codes
You can reset a remote control code registered to each input
selection key.
1
Press CODE SET.
SOURCE blinks twice.
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
2
Press the input selection key.
3
Use the numeric keys to enter “5098”.
Once the remote control code is reset successfully, SOURCE blinks
twice.
If it blinks six times, resetting has failed. Repeat from Step 1.
To reset the remote control to factory default settings
a Press CODE SET.
b Press RECEIVER.
c Use the numeric keys to enter “9981”.
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SU
R. DE
COD
E
CODE SET
RECEIVER
SOURCE
Numeric keys
Input selection keys
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Updating the unit’s firmware via the network En 113
New firmware that provides additional features or product
improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected
to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and
update it.
• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.107).
A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed
after ON SCREEN is pressed.
1
Read the on-screen description.
2
To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to
select “START” and press ENTER.
The on-screen display turns off.
3
If “Update Success Please Power Off!” appears on
the front display, press MAIN ZONE z on the front
panel.
The firmware update is complete.
• If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in Step 2. “!” (exclamation
mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a
message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.104). You can update the
unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen.
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network
Note
• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during
firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more
(depending on your Internet connection speed).
• If the unit is connected to the wireless network via a wireless network adapter,
network update may not be possible depending on the condition of the
wireless connection. In this case, update the firmware using the USB memory
device (p.107).
Information
icon
Message
System Icon
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
ENTER
Cursor keys
APPENDIX ➤ Frequently asked questions En 114
APPENDIX
The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound
balance...
If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to
optimize the speaker settings again (p.37). If you want to adjust the speaker settings
manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.91).
Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the
volume control...
If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the
volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or
speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum
volume level for the unit in advance (p.95). You can also set the maximum volume for
Zone2 (p.100).
I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning
on the unit...
By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically
applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the
volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.95). You can also set the initial
volume for Zone2 (p.100).
We are bothered by volume differences when switching
between input sources…
You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in
the “Option” menu (p.80).
I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at
all...
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.127). After
connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit,
enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This
setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your
system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback
devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device.
I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during
operations...
By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated
(such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you
when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.100) in the
“Setup” menu to turn off the short messages.
I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...
You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by
utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.102).
The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another
Yamaha product as well as the unit...
When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another
Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens,
register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each
remote control (p.105).
I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device
even when the unit is in standby mode…
If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output
videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in
standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.97) in the “Setup” menu
to “On”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when
this function is enabled.
Frequently asked questions
APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 115
Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.
First, check the following:
a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets
securely.
b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.
c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.
Power, system and remote control
Troubleshooting
Problem Cause Remedy
The power does not turn on.
The protection circuitry has been activated three times
consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby
indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power.
As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your
nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.
The power does not turn off.
The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.
Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to
initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable
from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)
The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.20).
The unit enters standby mode automatically.
The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again.
The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used
for the specified time.
To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup”
menu to “Off” (p.102).
The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.105).
The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short
circuit.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.20).
The unit is not reacting.
The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.
Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to
initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable
from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)
APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 116
The unit cannot be controlled using the remote
control.
The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5).
The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries.
The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or
strong lighting.
Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.
The remote control is set to control external devices.
Press RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key lights up in
orange).
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.105).
External devices cannot be controlled using the
remote control.
The remote control is set to control the unit.
Press SOURCE to set the remote control to control external devices (the key lights
up in green).
The corresponding remote control code is not set properly.
Set the remote control code again (p.108). Even if the remote control code is
registered properly, some products may not respond to the remote control.
The MHL-compatible mobile device cannot be
controlled using the remote control.
A remote control code for another playback device is assigned to
V-AUX.
Reset the remote control code registered to V-AUX (p.112).
The mobile device or its application is not externally controllable. Directly operate the mobile device itself.
The remote control does not learn new functions.
(RX-V775 [China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models]
only)
The batteries of the remote control of the unit and/or the external
device are weak.
Replace with new batteries.
The distance between the two remote controls is not appropriate. Place the remote controls at a proper distance (p.110).
The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not
compatible with the remote control.
Learning is impossible in this case.
Memory capacity is full.
Clear unnecessary assignments to free some memory space for new functions
(p.111).
Problem Cause Remedy
APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 117
Audio
Problem Cause Remedy
No sound.
Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.
Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio
format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.104).
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The volume cannot be increased.
The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.95).
A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.
No sound is coming from a specific speaker.
The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.104).
The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the
speaker.
To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.94).
Audio output of the speaker is disabled.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.37) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change
the speaker settings (p.91).
The volume of the speaker is set too low.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.37) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the
speaker volume (p.93).
The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is
defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.
The speaker is malfunctioning.
To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be
malfunctioning.
No sound is coming from the surround back
speaker.
The extended surround is disabled.
Use “Extended Surround” in the “Option” menu to select a decoder to be used
(p.80).
No sound is coming from the subwoofer.
The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency
signals.
To check it, set “Extra Bass” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, in order to output the
front channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer (p.92).
Subwoofer output is disabled.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.37) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use”
(p.92).
The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.
The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.
No sound from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from
the SPEAKERS terminals.
In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.97).
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds
the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 118
Video
No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is
used).
The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.
Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the
speakers connected to the unit.
A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with
an HDMI cable.
Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.25).
(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)
The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.
Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack
(p.96).
(If you are trying to use ARC)
ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.
Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.97). Also, enable ARC on the TV.
Only the front speakers work on multichannel
audio.
The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as
PCM) only.
To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.104). If necessary,
change the digital audio output setting on the playback device.
Noise/hum is heard.
The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device.
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The sound is distorted.
The volume of the unit is too high. Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, set it to “Off” (p.102).
A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.
Problem Cause Remedy
Problem Cause Remedy
No video.
Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Set “MON.CHK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.106).
The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is
defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
No video from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).
The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.
To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video
Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.104). For information about video signals
supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.128).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over
the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV.
The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI.
You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with
an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.23 to 26).
Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 119
FM/AM radio
Problem Cause Remedy
FM radio reception is weak or noisy.
There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio
reception (p.80).
Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
AM radio reception is weak or noisy.
The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors,
thermostats, or other electrical equipment.
It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor
AM antenna.
Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Select the station manually (p.53).
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
The AM radio signal is weak.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation.
Select the station manually (p.53).
Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with
the supplied AM antenna.
AM radio stations cannot be registered as
presets.
Auto Preset has been used.
Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations
manually (p.54).
APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 120
USB and network
Problem Cause Remedy
The unit does not detect the USB device.
The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.
The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.
Folders and files in the USB device cannot be
viewed.
The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function.
The network feature does not function.
The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained
properly.
Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup”
menu to “On” on the unit (p.98). If you want to configure the network parameters
manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other
network devices in your network (p.98).
The unit does not detect the PC.
The media sharing setting is not correct.
Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music
contents are shared (p.65).
Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access
of the unit to your PC.
Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.
The unit and PC are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and the PC to the same network.
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.98).
The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played
back.
The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.
Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For
information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music
stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.65).
The Internet radio cannot be played.
The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.
There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have
been stopped. Try the station later or select another station.
The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting
silence.
Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try
the station later or select another station.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your
network devices (such as the router).
Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be
played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station.
The port number varies depending on the radio station.
The application for smartphone/tablet “AV
Controller” does not detect the unit.
The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network.
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the
unit (p.98).
Firmware update via the network is failed. It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.107).
APPENDIX ➤ Error indications on the front display En 121
Error indications on the front display
Message Cause Remedy
Access denied Access to the PC is denied.
Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared
(p.65).
Access error
The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again.
The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.58).
There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.
Make sure your router and modem are turned on.
Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.33).
Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.
Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
MHL Overloaded
An overcurrent is flowing through the MHL-compatible mobile
device.
Turn off the unit and check the connection between the unit and mobile device.
No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.
No device
The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again.
Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.
Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn
it on again.
RemID Mismatch
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.105).
Unable to play
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some
reason.
Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be
defective.
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some
reason.
Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the
formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.65). If
the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with
heavy traffic.
USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again.
APPENDIX ➤ Ideal speaker layout En 122
Use this diagram as a guide. You do not need to adjust the speaker layout to the following diagram exactly.
Ideal speaker layout
12
3
45
6 7
99
QW
0.3 m (1 ft) or more
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
Turn it slightly inward to
reduce wall reflections.
Turn it slightly inward to
reduce wall reflections.
1 Front speaker (L)
2 Front speaker (R)
3 Center speaker
4 Surround speaker (L)
5 Surround speaker (R)
6 Surround back speaker (L)
7 Surround back speaker (R)
Q Presence speaker (L)
W Presence speaker (R)
9 Subwoofer
10° to 30°10° to 30°
APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 123
Audio information
■ Audio decoding format
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby
Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems
that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available:
“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three
modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for
game sources (for 2-channel sources only).
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a
high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This
format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital
Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
DTS-ES
DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This
decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a
surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a
discrete surround back channel is recorded.
DTS Express
DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher
compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is
developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on
BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home
theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS Neo:6
DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete
full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound.
DSD (Direct Stream Digital)
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super
Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz. The highest
frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology
offers better audio quality than that used for CDs.
FLAC
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio
formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality.
MP3
One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this
compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data
quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming
services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality
than MP3.
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This
technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called
Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).
Glossary
APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 124
Sampling frequency/Quantization bit
Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal
is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.
• Sampling frequency
Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate.
When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.
• Quantization bit
The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a
numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more
accurate.
WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by
converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other
compression methods.
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic
technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of
compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
■ Others
Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification
connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a
consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This
channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio
effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.
Lip sync
Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an
increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag
between audio and video output.
HDMI and video information
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and
the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because
each of these signals is independent.
Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined
and transmitted with a single cable.
Deep Color
Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available
colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems
process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology
allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate
on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors.
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video
signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable
without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a
secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at
“http://www.hdmi.org/”.
MHL
MHL (Mobile High-definition Link) is the interface standard for high-speed digital video signal transmission
that is developed for mobile devices. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals
from mobile devices (such as smartphones) using a single cable with any loss. As with HDMI, MHL
complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection).
x.v.Color
“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than
sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with
the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid,
natural images.
APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 125
Yamaha technologies
CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is
best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions
(such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are
differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP,
Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own
home.
CINEMA DSP 3D
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA
DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the
accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room.
Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music
formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound
system.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with
front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic
sound field in a listening room.
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)
Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without
front presence speakers. Even if the front presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D
sound field in your room.
APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 126
Video signal flow
Video signals input from a video device to the unit are
output to a TV as shown below.
■ Video conversion table
• You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.95) in the “Setup” menu.
• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.
HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO
m: Available
HDMI out COMPONENT VIDEO out
VIDEO
out
Resolution
480i/
576i
480p/
576p
720p 1080i 1080p 4K
480i/
576i
480p/
576p
720p 1080i
480i/
576i
HDMI in
480i/576i mmmmmm
480p/576p mmmmm
720p mmmm
1080i mmmm
1080p/50, 60 Hz mmmm
1080p/24 Hz mm
4K m
COMPONENT
VIDEO in
480i/576i mmmmmmm
480p/576p m
720p m
1080i m
VIDEO in 480i/576i mmmmmm m
Video device The unit TV
HDMI outHDMI in
COMPONENT
VIDEO in
COMPONENT
VIDEO out
VIDEO
out
VIDEO
in
APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 127
HDMI Control
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that
supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as
power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback
devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with
an HDMI cable.
For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.23) and “Connecting video
devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.28).
Operations available from the TV’s remote control
• Standby synchronization
• Volume control including mute
• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner
• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device
• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)
(Example)
Operations available from the unit’s remote control
• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene
selection (p.46)
• Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed)
• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) without registering
remote control codes (p.109)
(Example)
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after
connecting the TV and playback devices.
• This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.
1
Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
2
Enable HDMI Control on the unit, TV, and playback devices (such as
HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players).
To enable HDMI Control on the unit, set “HDMI Control” (p.96) in the “Setup”
menu to “On” and configure the related items (“TV Audio Input”, “ARC”, and
“Standby Sync”).
3
Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and
playback devices.
4
Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
5
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
6
Check the followings.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected.
If not, select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
Information on HDMI
HDMI Control
Turn off the TV
The unit turns off
(standby)
HDMI Control
Playback device
also turns off
HDMI Control
Press SCENE (BD/DVD)
Turns on and displays
video from the playback
device
HDMI Control
Playback starts
APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 128
7
Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning
off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 2 and plugging in the TV again in
Step 3. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices
exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works
more effectively.
HDMI signal compatibility
Audio signals
Video signals
The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending
on the type of the DVD player.
• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction
manual for each device.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device
outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device).
For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device.
Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example)
2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio
Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc),
HD DVD
DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD
Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video
Bitstream
(High definition audio)
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio, DTS
Express
BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD
• VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• 480p/60 Hz • 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• 576p/50 Hz
APPENDIX ➤ Trademarks En 129
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, Surround EX and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872;
7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS-HD, the
Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a
trademark of DTS, Inc.
Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
“Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has been
designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the
developer to meet Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory
standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance.
AirPlay, the AirPlay logo, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.
This receiver supports network connections.
HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of
HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.
MHL and the MHL logo are a trademark, registered trademark or service mark of MHL, LLC in the United
States and/or other countries.
x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of Digital Living Network
Alliance. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
Windows™
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Android™
Android is a trademark of Google Inc.
Trademarks
APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 130
Input jacks
• Analog Audio
[RX-V775]
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
Audio x 4 (AV 5–6, AUDIO 1–2)
[Other models]
Audio x 5 (AV 5–6, AUDIO 1–2, PHONO)
[RX-V675]
Audio x 4 (AV 5–6, AUDIO 1–2)
• Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)
Optical x 2 (AV 1, AV 4)
Coaxial x 2 (AV 2–3)
•Video
Composite x 5 (AV 3–6, VIDEO [Front Panel])
Component x 2 (AV 1–2)
• HDMI Input
HDMI x 6 (HDMI 1–5, V-AUX*)
* V-AUX: MHL input compatible
•Other
USB x 1 (USB2.0)
NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)
Output jacks
• Analog Audio
[RX-V775]
- Speaker Out x 9 (7 ch)
(FRONT L/R, CENTER,
SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R
*1
, EXTRA SP L/R
*2
)
*1 Note: Assignment is possible [SURROUND BACK,
BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)]
*2 Note: Assignment is possible [ZONE2, PRESENCE]
- Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R)
- Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1–2, mono)
- AV OUT x 1
- ZONE2 OUT x 1
- Headphone x 1
[RX-V675]
- Speaker Out x 9 (7 ch)
(FRONT L/R, CENTER,
SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R
*1
, EXTRA SP L/R
*2
)
*1 Note: Assignment is possible [SURROUND BACK,
BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)]
*2 Note: Assignment is possible [ZONE2, PRESENCE]
- Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1–2, mono)
- AV OUT x 1
- ZONE2 OUT x 1
- Headphone x 1
•Video
MONITOR OUT
- Component x 1
- Composite x 1
AV OUT
- Composite x 1
• HDMI Output
[RX-V775]
HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1–2)
[RX-V675]
HDMI OUT x 1
Other jacks
• YPAO MIC x 1
• REMOTE IN x 1
• REMOTE OUT x 1
• TRIGGER OUT x 1
• DC OUT x 1
HDMI
• HDMI features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC
(Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
-VGA
- 480i/60 Hz
- 576i/50 Hz
- 480p/60 Hz
- 576p/50 Hz
- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
- 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• Audio Format
-Dolby TrueHD
- Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby Digital
- DTS-HD Master Audio
- DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
- DTS Express
-DTS
- DSD 2-ch to 6-ch
- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)
• Content Protection: HDCP compatible
• Link Function: CEC supported
Specifications
APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 131
MHL
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
-VGA
- 480i/60 Hz
- 576i/50 Hz
- 480p/60 Hz
- 576p/50 Hz
- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080p/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• Audio Format
- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)
• Current Supply Capacity: 1.0 A
TUNER
• Analog Tuner
[U.K. and Europe models]
FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)
[Other models]
FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)
USB
• Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory
• Current Supply Capacity: 2.1 A
Network
• PC Client Function
• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5
• AirPlay supported
• Internet Radio
Compatible Decoding Formats
• Decoding Format
- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX
- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS Express
- DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
- DTS Digital Surround
• Post Decoding Format
- Dolby Pro Logic
- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic II Game
- Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game
- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema
Audio Section
• Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)
[RX-V775]
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R................................................................. 95 W+95 W
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R............................................................. 110 W+110 W
Center..............................................................................110 W
Surround L/R ...................................................... 110 W+110 W
Surround Back L/R ............................................. 110 W+110 W
[RX-V675]
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R................................................................. 90 W+90 W
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R............................................................. 105 W+105 W
Center..............................................................................105 W
Surround L/R ...................................................... 105 W+105 W
Surround Back L/R ............................................. 105 W+105 W
• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)
[RX-V775]
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R.....................................................................130 W/ch
Center .......................................................................130 W/ch
Surround L/R ..............................................................130 W/ch
Surround Back L/R.....................................................130 W/ch
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 Ω)
Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models]..........................160 W/ch
[RX-V675]
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R.....................................................................125 W/ch
Center .......................................................................125 W/ch
Surround L/R ..............................................................125 W/ch
Surround Back L/R.....................................................125 W/ch
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 Ω)
Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models]..........................150 W/ch
• Maximum Effective Output Power (JEITA, 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8
Ω
)
[China, Korea, Asia and General models]
[RX-V775]
Front L/R.....................................................................160 W/ch
Center ........................................................................160 W/ch
Surround L/R ..............................................................160 W/ch
Surround Back L/R.....................................................160 W/ch
[RX-V675]
Front L/R.....................................................................150 W/ch
Center ........................................................................150 W/ch
Surround L/R ..............................................................150 W/ch
Surround Back L/R.....................................................150 W/ch
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
[RX-V775]
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω) ..................................140/180/210/250 W
[RX-V675]
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω) ..................................130/170/200/240 W
• Damping Factor
Front L/R, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω .............................100 or more
APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 132
• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance
[RX-V775]
PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω)
[Except for U.S.A. and Canada models].............3.5 mV/47 kΩ
AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω)..............................200 mV/47 kΩ
[RX-V675]
AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω)..............................200 mV/47 kΩ
• Maximum Input Signal
[RX-V775]
PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD)
[Except for U.S.A. and Canada models]........................ 60 mV
AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) ........................... 2.3 V
[RX-V675]
AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) ........................... 2.3 V
• Output Level / Output Impedance
[RX-V775]
AV OUT ..............................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ
PRE OUT...................................................................1 V/1.2 kΩ
SUBWOOFER ...........................................................1 V/1.2 kΩ
ZONE2 OUT.......................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ
[RX-V675]
AV OUT ..............................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ
SUBWOOFER ...........................................................1 V/1.2 kΩ
ZONE2 OUT.......................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ
• Headphone Jack Rated Output / Impedance
AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) .............................100 mV/560 Ω
• Frequency Response
AV 5 etc. to Front (10 Hz to 100 kHz) ......................... +0/-3 dB
• RIAA Equalization Deviation
[RX-V775]
PHONO
[Except for U.S.A. and Canada models]....................0±0.5 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
[RX-V775]
PHONO to AV OUT (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V)
[Except for U.S.A. and Canada models]............. 0.02% or less
AV 5 etc. to Front (Pure Direct)
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω)............................... 0.06% or less
[RX-V675]
AV 5 etc. to Front (Pure Direct)
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω)............................... 0.06% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
[RX-V775]
PHONO (Input Shorted 5 mV, AV OUT)
[Except for U.S.A. and Canada models]............81 dB or more
AV 5 etc. (Input Shorted 250 mV, Speaker Out)
.........................................................................100 dB or more
[RX-V675]
AV 5 etc. (Input Shorted 250 mV, Speaker Out)
.........................................................................100 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R (Speaker Out) ..................................... 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation
[RX-V775]
PHONO (Input Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
[Except for U.S.A. and Canada models]
................................................................ 60 dB/55 dB or more
AV 5 etc. (Input 5.1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
................................................................ 60 dB/45 dB or more
[RX-V675]
AV 5 etc. (Input 5.1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
................................................................ 60 dB/45 dB or more
• Volume Control
Range............................................. MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB
Step ................................................................................ 0.5 dB
• Tone Control Characteristics
Bass Boost/Cut............................. ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 50 Hz
Bass Turnover ............................................................... 350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut..........................±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 20 kHz
Treble Turnover..............................................................3.5 kHz
• Filter Characteristics
(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back).......12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .....................................................24 dB/oct.
Video Section
• Video Signal Type
[U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models] ................NTSC
[Other models]....................................................................PAL
• Video Signal Type (Video Conversion)..................... NTSC/PAL
• Video Signal Level
Composite..............................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component
Y ..........................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Pb/Pr ................................................................0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω
• Video Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)
....................................................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more
• Video Signal to Noise Ratio................................ 50 dB or more
• Monitor Out Frequency Response (Video Conversion Off)
Component ............................................5 Hz to 60 MHz, -3 dB
FM Section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models].......................87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Asia and General models]
...................................... 87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models]................................ 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)
Mono ................................................................. 3 µV (20.8 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono ................................................................................71 dB
Stereo...............................................................................69 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)
Mono .................................................................................0.3%
Stereo................................................................................ 0.5%
• Antenna Input................................................ 75 Ω unbalanced
APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 133
AM section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ......................... 530 to 1710 kHz
[Asia and General models]...... 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models]......................................... 531 kHz to 1611 kHz
General
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ......................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[General model]............ AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model]................................................. AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model]................................................. AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] ............................................ AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models].............................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[Asia model] ................................... AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................400 W/500 VA
[China, Asia and General models] ................................. 270 W
[Other models]................................................................ 300 W
• Standby Power Consumption
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................0.10 W or less
[Other models]....................................................0.15 W or less
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals)
.................................................................................3 W or less
Network Standby On ...............................................3 W or less
• Maximum Power Consumption
[Asia and General models]............................................. 590 W
• Dimensions (W x H x D)
[RX-V775] ..... 435 x 171 x 368 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 14-1/2”)
[RX-V675] ..... 435 x 171 x 364 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 14-3/8”)
* Including legs and protrusions
•Weight
[RX-V775] ..................................................... 10.5 kg (23.2 lbs)
[RX-V675] ..................................................... 10.0 kg (22.1 lbs)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
APPENDIX ➤ Index En 134
Symbols
★ keys 13
Exclamation mark (!) 104
, 113
Lock icon (o) 102
Numerics
16:9 Normal (Aspect, Setup menu) 96
2.1-channel system 17
2ch Stereo (sound program) 50
3.1-channel system 17
4.1-channel system 17
4K signal (video signal resolution) 128
5.1-channel system 17
5ch BI-AMP (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 91
6.1-channel system 16
, 20
7.1+2-channel system 16
, 19
7.1-channel system 16
, 19, 20
7ch +1ZONE (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 91
7ch Stereo (sound program) 50
A
Access denied (error indication) 121
Access error (error indication) 121
Action Game (sound program) 49
Adaptive DRC (Option menu) 79
Adaptive DSP Level (Sound, Setup menu) 95
Adjustment (Lipsync, Setup menu) 94
ADVANCED SETUP menu 105
Adventure (sound program) 49
AirPlay 70
AM antenna connection 32
AM radio listening 53
Amp (Audio Output, Setup menu) 97
ARC (Audio Return Channel) 23
ARC (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 97
Aspect (Video Mode, Setup menu) 96
Audio Decoder (front display information) 77
Audio device connection 31
Audio file format (PC/NAS) 65
Audio file format (USB storage device) 62
Audio In (Input menu) 82
AUDIO jack 22
Audio Output (HDMI, Setup menu) 97
Audio Return Channel (ARC) 23
Audio Signal (Information menu) 104
Auto Power Standby (ECO, Setup menu) 102
Auto Preset (FM radio) 57
Auto Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) 37
Auto/Manual Select (Lipsync, Setup menu) 94
Automatic speaker setting optimization 37
Automatic station preset (FM radio) 57
AutoPowerStdby (ECO, Setup menu) 102
AV OUT jack 11
, 12
B
Banana plug 20
Basic playback operation 45
Bass (Tone Control, Option menu) 79
Bass Cross Over (Speaker, Setup menu) 92
Bi-amp speaker connection 21
Bitrate (Audio Signal, Information menu) 104
Bitstream 128
C
CAT-5 cable 33
Cellar Club (sound program) 50
Center (Speaker, Setup menu) 91
Center Image (Sound Program menu) 87
Center Width (Sound Program menu) 87
Chamber (sound program) 50
Channel (Audio Signal, Information menu) 104
Check SP Wires (error indication) 121
Check Sur. (YPAO error message) 43
CINEMA DSP 3D 48
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (Option menu) 79
CLASSICAL (sound program subcategory) 50
Clear Preset (FM/AM radio) 57
Clearing (remote control) 111
Clock Time (Radio Data System) 55
COAXIAL jack 22
Component video cable 22
Component video connection (video device) 28
COMPONENT VIDEO jack 22
Composite video connection (video device) 29
Compressed Music Enhancer 52
Configuration (Speaker, Setup menu) 91
Crossover frequency setting 92
Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer) 37
D
DC OUT (Function, Setup menu) 101
DC OUT jack 11
, 12
Decode Type (Sound Program menu) 86
Decoder Mode (Input menu) 82
Decoder Off (front display information) 77
Default Gateway (IP Address, Setup menu) 98
Default Gateway (Network, Information menu) 104
Default setting restoration 106
Delay Enable (Lipsync, Setup menu) 94
Detail (Load, Scene menu) 84
Device Control (Load, Scene menu) 84
DHCP (IP Address, Setup menu) 98
Dialog Adjust (Option menu) 79
Dialog Lift (Dialog Adjust, Option menu) 79
Dialog Lvl (Dialog Adjust, Option menu) 79
Dialogue (Audio Signal, Information menu) 104
Dialogue Adjust (Option menu) 79
Dialogue Level (Dialogue Adjust, Option menu) 79
Dialogue Lift (Dialogue Adjust, Option menu) 79
Dialogue normalization level 104
Digital coaxial cable 22
Digital Media Controller (DMC) 83
Digital optical cable 22
Dimension (Sound Program menu) 87
Index
APPENDIX ➤ Index En 135
Dimmer (Front Display) (Display Set, Setup menu) 100
Direct (Sound Program menu) 87
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) 123
DISPLAY key 13
Display Set (Function, Setup menu) 100
Distance (Speaker, Setup menu) 93
Distance (YPAO measurement result) 42
DLNA 65
DMC (Digital Media Controller) 83
DMC Control (Input menu) 83
DNS Server (IP Address, Setup menu) 98
DNS Server (Network, Information menu) 104
Dolby Digital EX (Extended Surround) 80
Dolby Pro Logic (surround decoder) 51
Dolby Pro Logic II Game (surround decoder) 51
Dolby Pro Logic II Movie (surround decoder) 51
Dolby Pro Logic II Music (surround decoder) 51
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game (surround decoder) 51
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (Extended Surround) 80
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (surround decoder) 51
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music (Extended Surround) 80
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music (surround decoder) 51
Drama (sound program) 49
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) 123
DSP Level (Sound Program menu) 86
DSP Program (front display information) 77
DTS Neo:6 Cinema (surround decoder) 51
DTS Neo:6 Music (surround decoder) 51
DTS-ES (Extended Surround) 80
Dynamic Range (Sound, Setup menu) 94
E
ECO (Setup menu) 102
ECO Mode (ECO, Setup menu) 102
Enhancer (Option menu) 80
ENHANCER (sound mode) 52
ENTERTAINMENT (sound program subcategory) 49
Error indication (front display) 121
EX/ES (Extended Surround, Option menu) 80
EXTD Surround (Option menu) 80
Extended Surround (Option menu) 80
External device control (remote control) 108
External device operation key (remote control) 13
External power amplifier 34
Extra Bass (Speaker, Setup menu) 92
F
Filter (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 98
Firmware update 107
Firmware update (network) 107
, 113
Firmware update (USB) 107
Firmware Version (System, Information menu) 104
Firmware version check 107
FM antenna connection 32
FM Mode (Option menu) 80
FM radio listening 53
FM/AM radio tuning 53
Format (Audio Signal, Information menu) 104
Frequency (FM/AM radio) 53
Frequency step setting 53
, 106
Front (Speaker, Setup menu) 91
Front / Rear Balance (Sound Program menu) 87
Front display (part names and functions) 10
Front display brightness 100
Front display information 77
Front panel (part names and functions) 8
, 9
Front panel jack connection 31
Front Presence (Speaker, Setup menu) 92
Function (Setup menu) 100
G
GND terminal 31
Ground lead 31
H
Hall in Munich (sound program) 50
Hall in Vienna (sound program) 50
HDMI (Setup menu) 96
HDMI cable 22
HDMI connection (video device) 28
HDMI Control (HDMI, Setup menu) 96
HDMI jack 22
HDMI Monitor (Information menu) 104
HDMI OUT (Audio Output, Setup menu) 97
HDMI OUT1 (Audio Output, Setup menu) 97
HDMI OUT2 (Audio Output, Setup menu) 97
HDMI output selection 45
HDMI signal compatibility 128
Headphones 48
Height Balance (Sound Program menu) 87
High definition audio 128
High speed HDMI cable 22
I
In.Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 80
Indicator (part names and functions) 10
INFO key 8
, 9, 13
Information display (front display) 10
Information menu 103
Information switching (front display) 77
INIT (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 106
Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 86
Initial Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 95
Initial Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 100
Input (Audio Signal, Information menu) 104
Input (front display information) 77
Input menu 81
Input selection key (remote control) 13
Input Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 80
Internal Error (error indication) 121
Internal Error (YPAO error message) 43
Internet radio listening 68
IP Address (Network, Information menu) 104
IP Address (Network, Setup menu) 98
iPod charge 58
iPod connection 58
iPod content playback 59
iPod content playback (AirPlay) 70
iTunes content playback (AirPlay) 70
L
Language (Setup menu) 103
APPENDIX ➤ Index En 136
Learning (remote control) 110
Left / Right Balance (Sound Program menu) 87
Level (Sound Program menu) 87
Level (Speaker, Setup menu) 93
Level (YPAO measurement result) 42
Level Error (YPAO warning message) 44
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 124
Lipsync 124
Lipsync (Sound, Setup menu) 94
LIVE/CLUB (sound program subcategory) 50
Liveness (Sound Program menu) 86
Load (Scene menu) 84
Low Frequency Effects (LFE) 124
M
MAC Address (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 98
MAC Address (Network, Information menu) 104
MAC Address Filter (Network, Setup menu) 98
Main Zone Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 99
Manual Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) 91
Manual speaker configuration 91
Manual station preset (FM/AM radio) 54
Max Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 95
Max Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 100
Measurement result (YPAO) 41
Media sharing setup 65
Memory Guard (Function, Setup menu) 102
Menu language selection 36
Menu operation key (remote control) 13
MHL cable 22
MHL connection 32
MHL jack 22
MHL Overloaded (error indication) 121
MHL-compatible mobile device 32
MODE key 13
MON.CHK (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 106
Monaural Mix (Sound Program menu) 87
Monaural reception (FM radio) 53
Monitor check 106
Mono Movie (sound program) 49
MOVIE (sound program category) 49
MOVIE THEATER (sound program subcategory) 49
Multi measurement (YPAO) 40
Multi Zone (Information menu) 104
Multi Zone (Setup menu) 99
Multiple room playback 72
Multi-zone 72
MUSIC (sound program category) 50
Music Video (sound program) 49
MUTE key 13
Muting 45
N
NAS (Network Attached Storage) 33
NAS connection 33
NAS content playback 65
Network (Information menu) 104
Network (Setup menu) 98
Network Attached Storage (NAS) 33
Network cable 33
Network connection 33
Network information 104
Network Name (Network, Information menu) 104
Network Name (Network, Setup menu) 99
Network Standby (Network, Setup menu) 98
No content (error indication) 121
No device (error indication) 121
No F.PRNS SP (YPAO error message) 43
No Front SP (YPAO error message) 43
No MIC (YPAO error message) 43
No Signal (YPAO error message) 43
No Sur. SP (YPAO error message) 43
Noisy (YPAO error message) 43
Normal (Wiring, YPAO measurement result) 42
NTSC (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 106
Numeric key (remote control) 13
O
ON SCREEN key 13
OPTICAL jack 22
OPTION key 13
Option menu 78
Out of Phase (YPAO warning message) 44
Output (Audio Signal, Information menu) 104
Over Distance (YPAO warning message) 44
P
PAL (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 106
Panorama (Sound Program menu) 87
Parametric EQ (Speaker, Setup menu) 93
PARTY key 13
Party mode 76
Party Mode Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 100
PC connection 33
PC content playback 65
PHONES jack 8
, 9
PHONO jack 11
Playback device connection 28
Playback device operation (remote control) 109
Please wait (error indication) 121
Power Amp Assign (Speaker, Setup menu) 91
Power cable connection 35
Power management 102
Power Mode (DC OUT, Setup menu) 101
PRE OUT jack 11
Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) 54
Program Service (Radio Data System) 55
Program Type (Radio Data System) 55
Pure Direct 52
PURE DIRECT (sound mode) 52
Q
Q factor 93
R
Radio Data System (FM radio) 55
Radio Data System information 55
Radio Data System tuning 55
Radio Text (Radio Data System) 55
Rear panel (part names and functions) 11
, 12
Recording device connection 34
RemID Mismatch (error indication) 121
APPENDIX ➤ Index En 137
Remote connection 74
Remote control (part names and functions) 13
Remote control code registration
(playback device) 109
Remote control code registration (TV) 108
Remote Control Code Search 108
, 109
Remote control ID setting 105
Remote control ID setting (remote control) 105
Remote control sensor 8
, 9
Remote control signal transmitter (remote control) 13
REMOTE ID (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 105
Remote ID (System, Information menu) 104
REMOTE IN jack 11
, 12
REMOTE OUT jack 11
, 12
Rename (input name) 82
Rename (network name) 99
Rename (scene name) 85
Rename/Icon Select (Input menu) 82
Rename/Icon Select (Scene menu) 85
Repeat (iPod, Option menu) 61
Repeat (PC/NAS, Option menu) 67
Repeat (USB storage device, Option menu) 64
Reset (remote control) 112
Reset (Scene menu) 85
Resolution (Video Mode, Setup menu) 95
Reverb Delay (Sound Program menu) 87
Reverb Level (Sound Program menu) 87
Reverb Time (Sound Program menu) 87
Reverse (Wiring, YPAO measurement result) 42
Roleplaying Game (sound program) 49
Room Size (Sound Program menu) 86
Router connection 33
S
Sampling (Audio Signal, Information menu) 104
Save (Scene menu) 84
SBR → SBL (YPAO error message) 43
Scene configuration 46
SCENE function 46
SCENE link playback 46
Scene menu 83
Sci-Fi (sound program) 49
Setup menu 88
Short Message (Display Set, Setup menu) 100
Shuffle (iPod, Option menu) 61
Shuffle (PC/NAS. Option menu) 67
Shuffle (USB storage device, Option menu) 64
Signal information 104
SILENT CINEMA 48
Simple play (iPod) 60
Single measurement (YPAO) 39
Size (YPAO measurement result) 42
SLEEP key 13
Sleep timer 13
Sleep timer (Zone2) 75
Sound (Setup menu) 94
Sound field effect 48
Sound mode selection 47
Sound program 49
, 50
Sound Program menu 85
SP IMP. (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 105
Speaker (Setup menu) 91
Speaker cable connection 20
Speaker connection 19
Speaker impedance 15
Speaker Impedance (System, Information menu) 104
Speaker impedance setting 18
, 105
Speaker indicator (front display) 10
Speaker placement 15
Spectacle (sound program) 49
Sports (sound program) 49
Standard (sound program) 49
Standby indicator (front panel) 8
, 9
Standby Sync (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 97
Standby Through (HDMI, Setup menu) 97
Station preset (FM/AM radio) 54
Status (Network, Information menu) 104
STEREO (sound program subcategory) 50
Stereo pin cable (RCA cable) 22
Stereo reception (FM radio) 53
STP network cable 33
STRAIGHT (sound mode) 51
Straight decode 51
Subnet Mask (IP Address, Setup menu) 98
Subnet Mask (Network, Information menu) 104
Subwoofer (Speaker, Setup menu) 92
Subwoofer connection 21
Subwoofer Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 80
SUR.DECODE (sound mode) 51
Surround (Speaker, Setup menu) 91
Surround Back (Speaker, Setup menu) 92
Surround Back Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 86
Surround Back Liveness (Sound Program menu) 86
Surround Back Room Size (Sound Program menu) 86
Surround decoder 51
Surround Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 86
Surround Liveness (Sound Program menu) 86
Surround Room Size (Sound Program menu) 86
SW.Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 80
System (Information menu) 104
System ID (System, Information menu) 104
T
Target Zone (Trigger Output, Setup menu) 101
Test Tone (Speaker, Setup menu) 94
The Bottom Line (sound program) 50
The Roxy Theatre (sound program) 50
Tone Control (Option menu) 79
TONE CONTROL key 8
, 9
TP (Traffic Program) 55
Traffic information (Radio Data System) 55
Traffic Program (FM radio, Option menu) 55
Treble (Tone Control, Option menu) 79
Trigger function 35
Trigger Mode (Trigger Output, Setup menu) 101
TRIGGER OUT jack 11
, 12
Trigger Output (Function, Setup menu) 101
TU (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 106
Tuner Freq. Step (System, Information menu) 104
Turntable connection 31
APPENDIX ➤ Index En 138
TV Audio Input (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 96
TV connection 23
TV connection (ARC-compatible TV) 23
TV connection (HDMI Control-compatible TV) 25
TV connection (TV with HDMI input jacks) 26
TV connection (TV without HDMI input jacks) 27
TV FORMAT (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 106
TV Format (System, Information menu) 104
TV operation (remote control) 108
TV operation key (remote control) 13
U
Unable to play (error indication) 121
UPDATE (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 107
USB jack 8
, 9
USB mass storage class device 62
USB Overloaded (error indication) 121
USB storage device connection 62
USB storage device content playback 62
User Cancel (YPAO error message) 43
V
VERSION (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 107
Version error (error indication) 121
Video (Setup menu) 95
VIDEO AUX jack 8
, 9
Video device connection 28
VIDEO jack 22
Video Mode (Option menu) 80
Video Mode (Video, Setup menu) 95
Video Out (Input menu) 83
Video pin cable 22
Video Signal (Information menu) 104
Video signal flow 126
Video signal type setting 106
Video/audio input jack combination 29
Virtual CINEMA DSP 48
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) 7
Voltage Selection 35
VOLTAGE SELECTOR 11
, 12
Volume Interlock (Input menu) 83
Volume Trim (Option menu) 80
VPS (Virtual Presence Speaker) 7
W
Wallpaper (Display Set, Setup menu) 101
Wiring (YPAO measurement result) 42
Y
Yamaha Parametric room
Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) 37
YPAO
(Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer 37
YPAO error message 43
YPAO MIC jack 8
, 9
YPAO microphone 37
YPAO warning message 44
Z
Zone Rename (Main Zone Set, Setup menu) 99
Zone Rename (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 100
Zone2 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 100
Zone2 speaker connection 73
© 2013 Yamaha Corporation YF236A0/EN
Transcripción de documentos
AV Receiver Owner’s Manual Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit. English CONTENTS Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 7 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Connecting an external power amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 FEATURES 6 Connecting recording devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 8 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Front panel (RX-V775) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Front panel (RX-V675) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Rear panel (RX-V775) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Rear panel (RX-V675) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 PREPARATIONS 14 General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 1 Placing speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 2 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 9 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . 37 Measuring at one listening position (single measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) (RX-V775 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Checking the measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 PLAYBACK 45 Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Selecting an HDMI output jack (RX-V775 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 (SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 3 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 4 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 6 Connecting to a network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 En 2 Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Sound Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . . 103 Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 105 Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Preparing Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Controlling Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MON.CHK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Viewing the status information on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Restoring the default settings (INIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Configuring playback settings for different playback sources Updating the firmware (UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 (Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Controlling external devices with the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Registering the remote control code for a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 CONFIGURATIONS 81 Registering the remote control codes for playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Programming from other remote controls (learning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Clearing functions learned from other remote controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Resetting remote control codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 En 3 APPENDIX 114 Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Ideal speaker layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 En 4 Accessories Operating range of the remote control Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product. • Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range shown below. Remote control Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2) (RX-V775) (RX-V675) Within 6 m (20 ft) 30° 30° 30° 30° Insert the batteries the right way round. AM antenna FM antenna *One of the above is supplied depending on the region of purchase. YPAO microphone CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual) • The illustrations of the main unit and remote control used in this manual are of the RX-V775 (U.S.A. model), unless otherwise specified. • Some features are not available in certain regions. • Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice. • This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control. Easy Setup Guide Safety Brochure • This manual describes all the “iPod”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to “iPod”, “iPhone” and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified. • indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations. • indicates supplementary explanations for better use. Accessories En 5 FEATURES What you can do with the unit Wide variety of supported content • iPod/iPhone/iPad . p.58 • USB . p.62 • Media server (PC/NAS) . p.65 • Internet radio . p.68 • AirPlay . p.70 Supports 2- to 7.1-channel (plus presence) speaker system. Allows you to enjoy your favorite acoustic spaces in various styles. • Automatically optimizing the speaker . p.37 settings to suit your room (YPAO) • Reproducing stereo or multichannel . p.48 sounds with the sound fields like actual movie theaters and concert halls (CINEMA DSP) • Enjoying compressed music with . p.52 enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) • Playing back music in multiple rooms . p.72 (multi-zone) Network contents Control Speakers Audio iPod/iPhone/iPad Audio HDMI Control USB device 3D and 4K signals supported Audio HDMI Control Audio/Video BD/DVD player Audio/Video TV AV receiver (the unit) Control Audio/Video (via HDMI/MHL) Smartphone/Tablet Change the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) . p.46 Sequential operation of a TV, AV receiver, and BD/DVD player (HDMI Control) TV remote control . p.127 FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 6 Full of useful functions! Useful tips ❑ Connecting various devices (p.28) ❑ Creating 3-dimensional sound fields (p.48) A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players), game consoles, camcorders, and other devices. Connecting presence speakers allows you to create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your own room (CINEMA DSP 3D). Even when no presence speakers are connected, the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) function produces 3D surround sound. The combination of video/audio input jacks does not match an external device... Use “Audio In” in the “Input” menu to change the combination of video/audio input jacks so that it matches the output jack(s) of your external device (p.29). Video and audio are not synchronized... Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay between video and audio output (p.94). BD/DVD player I want to hear audio from the TV speakers... Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the output destination of signals input into the unit (p.97). Your TV speakers may be selected as an output destination. Set-top box Game console Camcorder I want to use the supplied remote control to operate external devices… TV Register the remote control codes of the external devices (such as a TV and BD/DVD players) (p.108). ❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound with a single HDMI cable connection (Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.23) When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals. HDMI Control TV audio Video from external device ❑ Easy operation and wireless music playback from iPhone or Android device By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices. Visit our website for details. I want to change the on-screen menu language... ❑ Listening to FM/AM radio (p.53) Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a language from English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.36). The unit is equipped with a built-in FM/AM tuner. You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations as presets. I want to update the firmware... ❑ Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (p.52) When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry, which lets you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality. ❑ Easy operation with a TV screen You can navigate through different types of content (such as iPod, USB, and network), view information, or easily configure the settings using the on-screen menu. ❑ Low power consumption The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the unit’s power consumption (p.102). Use “UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to update the unit’s firmware (p.107). If the unit is connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed on the TV when a firmware update is available (p.113). Many other settings are available that let you to customize the unit. For details, see the following pages. • Input settings (p.81) • SCENE settings (p.84) • Sound program and surround decoder settings (p.86) • Various function settings (p.89) • Information view (such as audio signal and video signal) (p.104) • System settings (p.105) FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 7 Part names and functions Front panel (RX-V775) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : AM TUNING A MAIN ZONE B PURE DIRECT ZONE 2 ZONE CONTROL MEMORY INFO PRESET FM INPUT VOLUME SCENE BD DVD YPAO MIC PHONES TV TONE CONTROL NET PROGRAM RADIO STRAIGHT SILENT CINEMA C 1 MAIN ZONE z key Turns on/off (standby) the unit. 2 Standby indicator Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the following conditions. • HDMI Control is enabled (p.96) • Standby Through is enabled (p.97) • Network Standby is enabled (p.98) • An iPod is being charged (p.58) 3 ZONE 2 key Enables/disables the audio output to Zone2 (p.75). 4 ZONE CONTROL key Changes the zone (main zone or the Zone2) that is controlled by the keys and knobs on the front panel (p.75). 5 INFO key Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.77). 6 MEMORY key Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.54). 7 PRESET keys Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.54). D VIDEO AUX HDMI/ MHL 5V 1A E F G H I J 5V VIDEO 2.1A K 8 FM and AM keys Switch between FM and AM (p.53). 9 Front display Displays information (p.10). 0 Remote control sensor Receives remote control signals (p.5). A TUNING keys Select the radio frequency (p.53). B PURE DIRECT key Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.52). C INPUT knob Selects an input source. D PHONES jack For connecting headphones. E YPAO MIC jack For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.37). F TONE CONTROL key Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of output sounds (p.79). L G SCENE keys Select the registered input source, sound program, and various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.46). H PROGRAM keys Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.47). I STRAIGHT key Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.51). J VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game console (p.31) or a smartphone (p.32). K USB jack For connecting a USB storage device (p.62) or an iPod (p.58). VIDEO jack For inputting video when “USB” is selected as the input source (p.58). L VOLUME knob Adjusts the volume. FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 8 Front panel (RX-V675) 1 23 MAIN ZONE 4 56 7 8 9 : A B C YPAO MIC PURE DIRECT ZONE 2 ZONE CONTROL MEMORY INFO PRESET FM AM TUNING VOLUME SCENE BD DVD PHONES INPUT TV TONE CONTROL NET PROGRAM RADIO STRAIGHT SILENT CINEMA D 1 MAIN ZONE z key Turns on/off (standby) the unit. 2 Standby indicator Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the following conditions. • HDMI Control is enabled (p.96) • Standby Through is enabled (p.97) • Network Standby is enabled (p.98) • An iPod is being charged (p.58) 3 YPAO MIC jack For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.37). 4 ZONE 2 key Enables/disables the audio output to Zone2 (p.75). 5 Remote control sensor Receives remote control signals (p.5). 6 ZONE CONTROL key Changes the zone (main zone or the Zone2) that is controlled by the keys and knobs on the front panel (p.75). 7 INFO key Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.77). VIDEO AUX HDMI/ MHL 5V 1A E F G H I J VIDEO 5V 2.1A K 8 MEMORY key Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.54). 9 PRESET keys Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.54). 0 FM and AM keys Switch between FM and AM (p.53). A Front display Displays information (p.10). B TUNING keys Select the radio frequency (p.53). C PURE DIRECT key Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.52). D PHONES jack For connecting headphones. E INPUT keys Select an input source. F TONE CONTROL key Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of output sounds (p.79). L G SCENE keys Select the registered input source, sound program, and various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.46). H PROGRAM keys Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.47). I STRAIGHT key Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.51). J VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game console (p.31) or a smartphone (p.32). K USB jack For connecting a USB storage device (p.62) or an iPod (p.58). VIDEO jack For inputting video when “USB” is selected as the input source (p.58). L VOLUME knob Adjusts the volume. FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 9 Front display (indicators) 1 OUT 1 2 3 OUT1/OUT2 (RX-V775 only) Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI signal OUT (RX-V675 only) Lights up when HDMI signals are being output. 2 CINEMA DSP Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.48) is working. CINEMA DSP n Lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D (p.48) is working. 3 ENHANCER Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.52) is working. 4 ADAPTIVE DRC Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.79) is working. 7 89 SLEEP ZONE 2 : VOL. MUTE SW PL PR C L R SL SR SBL SB SBR A Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output. 5 6 ENHANCER ADAPTIVE DRC STEREO PARTY 3 TUNED 2 1 HDMI 4 B 6 PARTY (RX-V775 only) Lights up when the unit is in the party mode. (p.76) 7 SLEEP Lights up when the sleep timer is on. 8 ZONE2 Lights up when audio output to Zone2 is enabled (p.75). 9 MUTE Blinks when audio is muted. 0 Volume indicator Indicates the current volume. A Cursor indicators Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational. A C C Speaker indicators Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output. A Front speaker (L) S Front speaker (R) D Center speaker F Surround speaker (L) G Surround speaker (R) H Surround back speaker (L) J Surround back speaker (R) K Surround back speaker Z Presence speaker (L) X Presence speaker (R) L Subwoofer B Information display Displays the current status (such as input name and sound mode name). You can switch the information by pressing INFO (p.77). 5 STEREO Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal. TUNED Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station signal. FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 10 Rear panel (RX-V775) 6 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 : A (U.S.A. model) TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK HDMI 1 HDMI OUT (NET) HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 (BD/DVD) IN 1 2 ARC OUT EXTRA SP ZONE2/F.PRESENCE REMOTE OPTICAL AM VIDEO FM (TV) AV4 COMPONENT VIDEO COAXIAL (RADIO) PR ANTENNA AV3 Y PR PB PB AV2 VIDEO VIDEO FRONT OPTICAL CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP CENTER Y AV 1 MONITOR OUT COMPONENT VIDEO SINGLE SINGLE 1 2 AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 B ZONE 2 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT ZONE OUT FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK PRE OUT CD E F 1 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another room (p.74). 2 TRIGGER OUT jack For connecting to a device that supports the trigger function (p.35). 3 DC OUT jack For connecting to an optional accessory. 4 NETWORK jack For connecting to a network (p.33). 5 ANTENNA jacks For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.32). 6 HDMI OUT 1–2 jacks For connecting to HDMI-compatible TVs and outputting video/audio signals (p.23). When using ARC, TV audio signal can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack. SUBWOOFER * The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. G 7 MONITOR OUT jacks COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For connecting to a TV that supports component video and outputting video signals (p.27). VIDEO jack For connecting to a TV that supports composite video and outputting video signals (p.27). 8 HDMI 1–5 jacks For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.28). 9 SPEAKERS terminals For connecting to speakers (p.19). 0 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (General model only) Selects the switch position according to your local voltage (p.35). C AUDIO 1–2 jacks For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting audio signals (p.31). D AV 1–6 jacks For connecting to video/audio playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.28). E AV OUT jacks For outputting video/audio to a recording device (such as a VCR) (p.34). F ZONE2 OUT jacks For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and for outputting audio (p.73). G PRE OUT jacks For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier or to an external power amplifier (p.34). A Power cable For connecting to an AC wall outlet (p.35). B PHONO jacks (Except for U.S.A. and Canada models) For connecting to a turntable (p.31). FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 11 Rear panel (RX-V675) 5 1 2 3 4 7 6 8 9 : (U.S.A. model) TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK HDMI 1 HDMI OUT (NET) HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 (BD/DVD) IN ARC OUT EXTRA SP REMOTE OPTICAL AM VIDEO FM (TV) AV4 ZONE2/F.PRESENCE COMPONENT VIDEO COAXIAL (RADIO) PR ANTENNA AV3 Y PR PB PB AV2 VIDEO VIDEO FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP OPTICAL Y AV 1 MONITOR OUT COMPONENT VIDEO SINGLE AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 ZONE 2 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT ZONE OUT AB C D E 1 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another room (p.74). 2 TRIGGER OUT jack For connecting to a device that supports the trigger function (p.35). 3 DC OUT jack For connecting to an optional accessory. 4 NETWORK jack For connecting to a network (p.33). 5 HDMI OUT jack For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.23). When using ARC, TV audio signal can also be input through the HDMI OUT jack. 6 ANTENNA jacks For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.32). 7 HDMI 1–5 jacks For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.28). SUBWOOFER PRE OUT * The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. F 8 SPEAKERS terminals For connecting to speakers (p.19). 9 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (General model only) Selects the switch position according to your local voltage (p.35). 0 Power cable For connecting to an AC wall outlet (p.35). A AUDIO 1–2 jacks E MONITOR OUT jacks COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For connecting to a TV that supports component video and outputting video signals (p.27). VIDEO jack For connecting to a TV that supports composite video and outputting video signals (p.27). F SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1–2 jacks For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.34). For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting audio signals (p.31). B AV 1–6 jacks For connecting to video/audio playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.28). C AV OUT jacks For outputting video/audio to a recording device (such as a VCR) (p.34). D ZONE2 OUT jacks For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and for outputting audio (p.73). FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 12 Remote control 1 Remote control signal transmitter 1 Transmits infrared signals. 2 SOURCE z key 2 RECEIVER SOURCE Turns on/off an external device. SOURCE key HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 3 Sets the remote control to operate external devices (p.109). This key lights up in green after pressed. V-AUX RECEIVER key AV 1 2 3 4 Sets the remote control to operate the unit (p.109). This key lights up in orange after pressed. AUDIO 4 5 5 6 1 TUNER USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 TV PROGRAM 7 TOP MENU NET MUTE OPTION I J K ENTER RETURN B C D E G H RADIO POP-UP/MENU 9 : A HDMI OUT VOLUME ON SCREEN RECEIVER z key Turns on/off (standby) the unit. SCENE BD DVD 6 8 2 DISPLAY L BAND MODE TUNING MUSIC SLEEP 1 2 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is controlled by the remote control (p.75). 6 PROGRAM keys 5 6 9 0 3 7 4 Select a sound program (p.47). 7 External device operation keys 8 MEMORY 10 Select menus for external devices (p.109). ENT 8 ON SCREEN key TV F 4 MAIN/ZONE2 switch Select the registered input source, sound program, and various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.46). SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT INFO Select an input source for playback. HDMI 1–5 HDMI 1–5 jacks V-AUX VIDEO AUX jack (on the front panel) AV 1–6 AV 1–6 jacks AUDIO 1–2 AUDIO 1–2 jacks TUNER FM/AM radio USB USB jack (on the front panel) NET NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a desired network source) ★ (RX-V675, RX-V775 [U.S.A. and Canada models]) Changes the external device to be controlled without switching the input source. PHONO (RX-V775 [except for U.S.A. and Canada models]) PHONO jacks 5 SCENE keys PRESET MOVIE 3 Input selection keys INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH CODE SET M Displays the on-screen menu on the TV. 9 Menu operation keys Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter. ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. (RX-V775 U.S.A. model) 0 MODE key Switches the iPod operation modes (p.60). A Radio keys Operate the FM/AM radio when “TUNER” is selected as the input source (p.53). BAND Switches between FM and AM radio. PRESET Select a preset station. TUNING Select the radio frequency. External device operation keys Let you play back and perform other operations for external devices when an input source other than “TUNER” is selected (p.109). B Sound mode keys Select a sound mode (p.47). C INFO key Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.77). D SLEEP key Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off). E Numeric keys Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies. MEMORY key Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets (p.54). F TV operation keys Let you select TV input and volume, and perform other TV operations (p.108). G HDMI OUT key (RX-V775 only) Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output (p.45). H PARTY key (RX-V775 only) Turns on/off the party mode (p.76). I VOLUME keys Adjust the volume. J MUTE key Mutes the audio output. K OPTION key Displays the option menu (p.78). L DISPLAY key Displays status information on the TV (p.77). M CODE SET key Registers remote control codes of external devices on the remote control (p.108). • To operate external devices with the remote control, register a remote control code for each device before using (p.108). FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 13 PREPARATIONS General setup procedure 1 Placing speakers (p.15) Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place them in your room. 2 Connecting speakers (p.19) Connect the speakers to the unit. 3 Connecting a TV (p.23) Connect a TV to the unit. 4 Connecting playback devices (p.28) Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit. 5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.32) Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit. 6 Connecting to a network (p.33) Connect the unit to a network. 7 Connecting other devices (p.34) Connect external devices, such as an external power amplifier (RX-V775 only) and recording devices. 8 Connecting the power cable (p.35) After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable. 9 Selecting an on-screen menu language (p.36) Select the desired on-screen menu language (default: English). 10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) (p.37) Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room (YPAO). This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit! PREPARATIONS ➤ General setup procedure En 14 1 Speaker placement 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 Placing speakers Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place the speakers and subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples. Caution • Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.18). Speaker system (the number of channels) Speaker type Front (L) Abbr. 1 Front (R) 2 Center 3 Surround (L) 4 Surround (R) 5 Surround back (L) 6 Surround back (R) 7 Surround back 8 Presence (L) Q Presence (R) W Subwoofer Function 9 Produce front right/left channel sounds (stereo sounds). Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogue and vocals). Produce surround right/left channel sounds. Surround speakers also produce surround back channel sounds when no surround back speakers are connected. Produce surround back left/right channel sounds. 7.1+2 7.1 7.1 6.1 5.1 Front 5.1 4.1 3.1 2.1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Produces sounds mixed from surround back left/right channel sounds. Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA DSP 3D (p.48), the presence speakers create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your room. Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces the bass parts of other channels. This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● • For information on the ideal speaker layout, see “Ideal speaker layout” (p.122). • If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers or presence speakers. To reinforce the rear right/left sounds, use them as surround back speakers. To create a natural 3-dimensional sound field, use them as presence speakers. • Two subwoofers connected to the unit output the same sounds. PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 15 1 Speaker placement 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 7.1+2-channel system 7.1-channel system (using surround back speakers) Q W 1 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers. 6.1-channel system W 1 4 5 6 7.1-channel system (using presence speakers) Q 3 4 7 • The surround back speakers and presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the selected CINEMA DSP (p.48). 9 9 9 2 1 2 9 3 5 2 3 4 5 8 This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying 5.1-channel contents. This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speaker. PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 16 1 Speaker placement 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 5.1-channel system 4.1-channel system 1 9 2 1 3 2 9 4 5 This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying 5.1-channel contents. 4 5 2.1-channel system Front 5.1-channel system 1 Q W 1 9 2 9 2 3 Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP). This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field, and creates the virtual surround speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP). • Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system. PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 17 1 Speaker placement 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Setting the speaker impedance Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. 1 Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall outlet. 2 While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z. MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT 3 Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front display. SPIMP.8MIN 4 5 Press STRAIGHT to select “6 Ω MIN”. Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the power cable from the AC wall outlet. You are now ready to connect the speakers. PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 18 1 2 Speaker connections 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 Connecting speakers Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit. The following diagrams provide connections for 7.1+2-, 7.1-, and 6.1-channel systems as examples. For other systems, connect speakers while referring to the connection diagram for the 6.1-channel system. 7.1+2-channel system 7.1-channel system (using surround back speakers) EXTRA SP ZONE2/F.PRESENCE EXTRA SP ZONE2/F.PRESENCE Caution The unit (rear) • Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before connecting the speakers. • Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on. The unit (rear) SPEAKERS FRONT CENTER SPEAKERS SURROUND FRONT SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP CENTER CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP CENTER SINGLE 1 SINGLE 1 2 2 SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER • The illustrations of the unit (rear) used in this section are of the RX-V775. Cables required for connection (commercially available) Speaker cables (x the number of speakers) + – Q W + – 1 2 1 2 Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers) 9 3 9 4 5 6 7 9 3 4 5 6 7 PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 19 1 2 Speaker connections 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 7.1-channel system (using presence speakers) ■ Connecting speaker cables 6.1-channel system EXTRA SP ZONE2/F.PRESENCE EXTRA SP ZONE2/F.PRESENCE The unit (rear) CENTER a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable and twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together. The unit (rear) SPEAKERS FRONT Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal. SPEAKERS SURROUND FRONT SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP CENTER CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP CENTER SINGLE 1 SINGLE 1 2 2 SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER b Loosen the speaker terminal. c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the terminal. d Tighten the terminal. + (red) b c FR ON T d Q W 1 a - (black) 2 1 2 Using a banana plug (U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia and General models only) 9 3 9 a Tighten the speaker terminal. 3 b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal. 4 5 4 5 8 Banana plug a FR ON T b When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 20 1 2 Speaker connections 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Push-type speaker terminals (RX-V675 only) a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together. b Press down the tab. c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the hole in the terminal. d Release the tab. a Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the FRONT jacks and SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP jacks. To enable the bi-amp function, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.91) in the “Setup” menu to “5ch BI-AMP” after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet. Caution • Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables. • Surround back speakers cannot be used during bi-amp connections. EXTRA SP ZONE2/F.PRESENCE ZO EXT NE RA 2/F SP .PR ES E NC E d b c + (red) The unit (rear) SPEAKERS FRONT - (black) CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP CENTER SINGLE 1 ■ Connecting the subwoofer 2 SUBWOOFER Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer. Audio pin cable 1 2 3 9 4 5 • The FRONT jacks and SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP/ZONE B jacks output the same signals. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 21 Input/output jacks and cables ■ Video/audio jacks ■ Video jacks ■ Audio jacks ❑ HDMI jacks ❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ❑ OPTICAL jacks Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single jack. Use an HDMI cable. Transmit video signals separated into three components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB), and chrominance red (PR). Use a component video cable with three plugs. Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before using the cable. HDMI cable Digital optical cable Component video cable OPTICAL ❑ COAXIAL jacks • Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality degradation. Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial cable. Digital coaxial cable T TOR OU • The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K video transmission features. • Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K videos. ❑ HDMI/MHL jack Transmits digital video and digital sound. Use an MHL cable. COAXIAL ❑ VIDEO jacks Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable. Video pin cable ❑ AUDIO jacks Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin cable (RCA cable). MHL cable Stereo pin cable • The VIDEO AUX jack on the front panel of the unit supports both HDMI and MHL connections. Use a cable that matches the jack on your MHL-compatible mobile device. When connecting an HDMI-compatible playback device to the VIDEO AUX jack, use an HDMI cable. For details on an MHL connection, see “MHL connection” (p.32). PREPARATIONS ➤ Input/output jacks and cables En 22 1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 Connecting a TV Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV. You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit. ■ Connection Method 1 (HDMI Control/ARC-compatible TV) Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable. The connection method varies depending on the functions and video input jacks available on your TV. Refer to the instruction manual of the TV and choose a connection method. Does your TV support Audio Return Channel (ARC)? Yes ■ Connection Method 1 (p.23) • The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters (p.96) in the “Setup” menu. • (RX-V775 only) HDMI Control is available only on the HDMI OUT 1 jack. • Use an HDMI cable that supports ARC. No HDMI OUT (ARC) jack The unit (rear) Does your TV support HDMI Control? HDMI OUT Yes ■ Connection Method 2 (p.25) 1 TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A 2 HDMI input (ARC-compatible) ARC DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK H HDMI OUT (NET) (BD IN 1 HDMI 2 HDMI ARC OUT ARC REMOTE No OPTICAL AM VIDEO FM HDMI (TV) AV4 COAXIAL (RADIO) ANTENNA AV3 Does your TV have an HDMI input jack? Yes Y ■ Connection Method 3 (p.26) PR PB AV2 VIDE VIDEO OPTICAL AV 1 MO COMPONENT VIDEO No AUDIO 1 ■ Connection Method 4 (p.27) AUDIO 2 ZONE AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT ZONE O TV About HDMI Control HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s power and volume with the TV’s remote control. You can also control playback devices (such as an HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player) connected to the unit with an HDMI cable. For details, see “HDMI Control” (p.127). About Audio Return Channel (ARC) • By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV (except some component video signals), regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.126). • By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV. • (RX-V775 only) You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.27). ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways under HDMI Control. If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control and ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 23 1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ❑ Necessary settings To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the following settings. 3 Configure the settings for HDMI Control. For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player). 1 After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices) and the power cable to the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices. b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices. 2 Configure the settings of the unit. c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV’s main power. d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. a Check that ARC is enabled on the TV. b Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. c Press ON SCREEN. ON SCREEN RETURN On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select the input source manually. On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed. OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER e Check the following. DISPLAY d Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. This completes the necessary settings. If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be automatically switched to “AV 4” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit. If you cannot hear the TV’s audio, check that “ARC” (p.97) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”. • If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again) the devices. It may solve the problem. • If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on the TV. • If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.97) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use a digital optical cable to input TV audio to the unit (p.25). e Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”. • “AV 4” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.96) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.46), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV). f Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER. g Use the cursor keys to select “On”. h Press ON SCREEN. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 24 1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Connection Method 2 (HDMI Control-compatible TV) ❑ Necessary settings Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable. To use HDMI Control, you need to configure the following settings. For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. • The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters (p.96) in the “Setup” menu. 1 After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices. 2 Configure the settings of the unit. • (RX-V775 only) HDMI Control is available only on the HDMI OUT 1 jack. HDMI OUT jack The unit (rear) HDMI OUT 1 TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A HDMI input 2 ARC DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK H HDMI OUT (NET) (BD IN 1 2 HDMI ARC OUT a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. b Press ON SCREEN. HDMI REMOTE OPTICAL AM VIDEO FM ON SCREEN HDMI (TV) AV4 COAXIAL OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER (RADIO) ANTENNA AV3 Y AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack PR PB OPTICAL AV2 OPTICAL AV 1 O (TV) AV4 ENTER VIDE VIDEO MO COMPONENT VIDEO RETURN DISPLAY OPTICAL c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. O AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 ZONE AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT ZONE O TV Audio output (digital optical) • By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV (except some component video signals), regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.126). • By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV. • (RX-V775 only) You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.27). d Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”. e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER. f Use the cursor keys to select “On”. g Press ON SCREEN. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 25 1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 Configure the settings for HDMI Control. a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as a HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player). b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices. c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV. ■ Connection Method 3 (TV with HDMI input jacks) Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable. HDMI OUT jack The unit (rear) HDMI OUT 1 TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. HDMI input 2 ARC DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK H HDMI OUT (NET) (BD IN 1 HDMI 2 HDMI ARC OUT REMOTE e Check the following. OPTICAL AM VIDEO HDMI COAXIAL On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select the input source manually. FM (TV) AV4 (RADIO) ANTENNA AV3 Y AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack PR PB OPTICAL AV2 OPTICAL AV 1 VIDE VIDEO O (TV) AV4 MO COMPONENT VIDEO On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed. f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. This completes the necessary settings. If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be automatically switched to “AV 4” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit. • If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again) the devices. It may solve the problem. • If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on the TV. • “AV 4” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks or if you want to use another input jack (other than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, use “TV Audio Input” (p.96) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.46), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV). OPTICAL O AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 ZONE AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT ZONE O TV Audio output (digital optical) If you switch the input source of the unit to “AV 4” using the AV 4 or SCENE(TV) keys, the TV audio will be played back on the unit. • By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV (except some component video signals), regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.126). • By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV. • If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks or if you want to use another input jack (other than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, connect the TV to one of the AV 1–6 and AUDIO 1–2 jacks. To use the SCENE function (p.46), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV). • (RX-V775 only) You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.27). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 26 1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Connection Method 4 (TV without HDMI input jacks) When connecting any video device to the AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the unit, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks. When connecting any video device to the AV 3–6 (VIDEO) jacks or the front VIDEO jack of the unit, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack. ❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable) MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack The unit (rear) DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK HDMI 1 HDMI OUT (NET) H (BD/DVD) IN 1 If you select “AV 4” as the input source by pressing AV 4 or SCENE(TV), the TV audio will be played back on the unit. Video input (composite video) TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A 2 VIDEO ARC OUT VIDEO REMOTE OPTICAL AM VIDEO FM (TV) AV4 V COMPONENT VIDEO COAXIAL (RADIO) ANTENNA MONITOR V PR AV3 Y PR PB PB OPTICAL AV2 • If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to the TV. VIDEO VIDEO OPTICAL O (TV) AV4 AV 1 Y MONITOR OUT COMPONENT VIDEO OPTICAL • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. O AUDIO 1 ZONE 2 AUDIO 2 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT FRONT SU ZONE OUT AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack • If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks or if you want to use another input jack (other than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, connect the TV to one of the AV 1–6 and AUDIO 1–2 jacks. To use the SCENE function (p.46), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV). ❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable) TV Audio output (digital optical) ■ Connecting another TV or a projector (RX-V775 only) MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks Video input (component video) COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR The unit (rear) PB TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A NETWORK HDMI 1 HDMI OUT (NET) HDMI OUT 2 jack PR PB Y DC OUT 5V 0.5A The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching videos with the remote control (p.45). PR H (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT The unit (rear) PB 1 TV 2 ARC IN 1 Y 2 ARC OUT PB TOR OUT REMOTE OPTICAL AM VIDEO HDMI Y FM TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A Y DC OUT 5V 0.5A 1 (BD 2 ARC OUT (RADIO) PR ANTENNA AV3 REMOTE Y PR PB OPTICAL PB OPTICAL AV2 AV 1 H HDMI OUT (NET) COMPONENT VIDEO COAXIAL OPTICAL NETWORK IN (TV) AV4 AM VIDEO FM (TV) AV4 VIDEO VIDEO O (TV) AV4 COAXIAL (RADIO) Y HDMI ANTENNA AV3 MONITOR OUT COMPONENT VIDEO Y OPTICAL PR PB AV2 VIDE VIDEO HDMI input HDMI OPTICAL O AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 ZONE 2 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT FRONT AV 1 SU MO COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE OUT AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack Audio output (digital optical) TV AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 ZONE AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT ZONE O TV (already connected) Projector • HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 27 1 2 3 4 Playback device connections 5 6 7 8 9 10 4 Connecting playback devices The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages. – Connecting an iPod (p.58) ■ Component video connection Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable (digital optical or digital coaxial). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. – Connecting a USB storage device (p.62) Output jacks on video device Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) Input jacks on the unit Video Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack. • If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device (p.29). The unit (rear) Y DC OUT 5V 0.5A 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 2 AM VIDEO HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 PB Y Y (RADIO) ANTENNA Y HDMI 4 HDMI 5 PR PB AV2 VIDE VIDEO OPTICAL MO COMPONENT VIDEO C C HDMI 1 PB COMPONENT VIDEO AV2 HDMI OUT PR Y FM AV3 The unit (rear) 1 PB ARC OPTICAL AV 1 K PR (B REMOTE (TV) AV4 HDMI 1 COMPONENT VIDEO PR H HDMI OUT (NET) COAXIAL (BD/DVD) Video output (component video) PR PB NETWORK OUT HDMI 1–5 jacks AV 1 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL) AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL) AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks IN Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable. Digital optical Digital coaxial Component video TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A ■ HDMI connection Audio AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 COAXIAL ZONE AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT ZONE Video device OPTICAL HDMI 5 (BD/DVD) HDMI output 2 HDMI ARC AM O AV 1 O OPTICAL FM HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO (RADIO) PR ANTENNA HDMI PR AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack or AV 2 (COAXIAL) jack Audio output (digital optical or digital coaxial) SPEAKERS PB VIDEO VIDEO FRONT CENTER If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–2, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. CENTER Y MONITOR OUT T VIDEO SINGLE 1 2 O1 AUDIO 2 ZONE 2 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT ZONE OUT FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK PRE OUT SUBWOOFER Video device If you select the input source by pressing HDMI 1–5, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. • The component video signals (other than 480i/576i signals) input to AV 1–2 jacks of the unit can be output from the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks only. To watch those videos, you need to connect your TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the unit (p.27). • To watch videos input to the HDMI 1–5 jacks, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the unit (p.23 to 26). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 28 1 2 3 4 Playback device connections 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Composite video connection ■ Changing the combination of video/audio input jacks Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device. You can connect a video device that has the following video/audio output jacks. Output jacks on video device Output jacks on video device Input jacks on the unit Input jacks on the unit Video Audio Composite video Video Digital coaxial AV 3 (VIDEO + COAXIAL) Digital optical AV 4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL) Analog stereo AV 5–6 (VIDEO + AUDIO) HDMI Audio Video Audio Digital optical HDMI 1–5 AV 1 (OPTICAL) AV 4 (OPTICAL) Digital coaxial HDMI 1–5 AV 2–3 (COAXIAL) Analog stereo HDMI 1–5 AV 5–6 (AUDIO) AUDIO 1–2 Analog stereo AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) AV 5–6 (AUDIO) AUDIO 1–2 Video output (composite video) Component video VIDEO AV 3–6 (VIDEO) jack V ❑ Necessary setting TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A DC OUT 5V 0.5A VIDEO NETWORK HDMI OUT (NET) IN 1 2 V ARC OUT REMOTE OPTICAL AM VIDEO (TV) AV4 COAXIAL Video device (R For example, if you have connected a video device to AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) and AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks of the unit, change the combination setting as follows. AN AV3 Y OPTICAL PR PB AV2 O VIDEO Video output (component video) O OPTICAL OPTICAL AV 1 COMPONENT VIDEO COAXIAL C C COAXIAL AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AV 5 AV 6 L A L COMPONENT VIDEO The unit (rear) AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A L DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK HDMI OUT (NET) PR IN R The unit (rear) R R 1 2 ARC OUT Y PR PB REMOTE OPTICAL AM VIDEO (TV) AV4 AV2 Any of AV 3 (COAXIAL) jack, AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack, AV 5–6 (AUDIO) jacks Audio output (either digital optical, digital coaxial, or analog stereo) COAXIAL PR PB PB Y Y (RADIO PB Y ANTEN AV3 Y PR PB AV2 VIDEO OPTICAL AV 1 If you select the input source by pressing AV 3–6, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. PR AUDIO COMPONENT VIDEO L L L AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AV 5 AV 6 AV OU R R Video device R AV 5 • To watch videos input to the AV 3–6 (VIDEO) jacks, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack (p.23 to 26) or to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack (p.27) of the unit. AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks Audio output (analog stereo) PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 29 1 2 3 4 Playback device connections 5 6 7 8 9 10 • The following operation is available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. 1 After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit. 2 Press AV 2 to select “AV 2” (video input jack to be used) as the input source. 5 6 7 Use the cursor keys to select “Audio In” and press ENTER. 8 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “AV5” (audio input jack to be used). V-AUX AV 1 2 3 5 6 1 USB NET N 4 AV 2 AUDIO TUNER TOP MENU 2 POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN 3 4 5 DISPLAY ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER This completes the necessary settings. If you select “AV 2” as the input source by pressing AV 2, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “AV2” (video input jack to be used) and press the cursor key (q). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 30 1 2 3 4 Playback device connections 5 6 7 8 9 10 Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) Connecting to the jacks on the front panel Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit. Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following connections. Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit. Audio output jacks on audio device Audio output jacks on the unit Digital optical AV 1 (OPTICAL) AV 4 (OPTICAL) Digital coaxial AV 2–3 (COAXIAL) Analog stereo AV 5–6 (AUDIO) AUDIO 1–2 Turntable (PHONO) PHONO* Audio output (either digital optical, digital coaxial, or analog stereo) AV 1–6 jacks AUDIO 1–2 jacks TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on the unit. ❑ HDMI connection Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with an HDMI cable. BD DVD PHONES * RX-V775 only (except for U.S.A. and Canada models) The unit (rear) Use the USB jack to connect an iPod or a USB storage device. For details, see “Connecting an iPod” (p.58) or “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.62). YPAO MIC SILENT CINEMA TONE CONTROL TV NET PROGRAM RADIO STRAIGHT VIDEO AUX HDMI/ MHL 5V 1A VIDEO 5V 2.1A HDMI The unit (front) O DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK HDMI 1 HDMI OUT (NET) HDMI 2 (BD/DVD) OPTICAL IN 1 2 ARC OUT C REMOTE OPTICAL VIDEO AM OPTICAL (TV) AV4 FM COAXIAL COMPONENT VIDEO O COAXIAL (RADIO) L PR ANTENNA AV3 Y PR PB COAXIAL AV2 C VIDEO OPTICAL VIDEO MONITOR OUT COMPONENT VIDEO L AUDIO 1 Game console R Y AV 1 Audio device L PB AUDIO 2 ZONE 2 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT FRONT ZONE OUT SURROUND PR R R PHONO L L L R R GND Camcorder R GND PHONO PHONO jacks* Ground lead Turntable Audio output (PHONO) If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–6, AUDIO 1–2 or PHONO*, the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit. When connecting a turntable If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit. • To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the unit (p.23 to 26). • You need to prepare an HDMI cable that match the output jacks on your device. (RX-V775 only [except for U.S.A. and Canada models]) • The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer. • Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal. • When “USB” is selected as the input source, video signals input to the VIDEO jack are output from the HDMI OUT and MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jacks. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 31 1 2 3 4 Playback device connections 5 FM/AM antenna connections 6 7 8 9 10 ❑ MHL connection Connect an MHL-compatible mobile device (such as smartphones) to the unit with an MHL cable. You can enjoy full HD videos and multichannel audio sources stored on the mobile device. The VIDEO AUX jack of the unit enables you to input videos and audio directly from the mobile device to the unit. 5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit. Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface. FM antenna BD DVD YPAO MIC PHONES TONE CONTROL TV AM antenna RADIO NET STRAIGHT PROGRAM SILENT CINEMA VIDEO AUX HDMI/ MHL 5V 1A VIDEO 5V 2.1A MHL The unit (front) The unit (rear) TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK HDMI 1 HDMI OUT (NET) HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 (BD/DVD) IN 1 2 ARC OUT REMOTE OPTICAL AM VIDEO FM (TV) AV4 MHL output COMPONENT VIDEO COAXIAL (RADIO) PR ANTENNA AV3 Y PB PR SPEAKERS PB AV2 VIDEO VIDEO FRONT OPTICAL AV 1 Mobile device CENTER SURROUND CENTER Y MHL COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT Assembling and connecting the AM antenna If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played back on the mobile device will be output from the unit. • To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the unit (p.23 to 26). • You need to prepare an MHL cable that match the jack on your mobile device. • You can operate the mobile device using the menu operation keys, external device operation keys and numeric keys on the remote control. However, some features may not be compatible, depending on the mobile device or its application. In this case, operate the mobile device itself. Hold down Insert Release • If “Standby Through” (p.97) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, you can output mobile device videos/audio to the TV or operate the mobile device using the remote control of the unit even when the unit is in standby mode. • The unit supplies power to the mobile device in the following conditions. – The unit is turned on. – The unit is in standby mode while “Standby Through” (p.97) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”. • Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit. • The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the FM/AM antennas En 32 1 2 3 4 5 6 Network connections 7 8 9 10 6 Connecting to a network Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable). You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit. Internet Network Attached Storage (NAS) • If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit, as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network parameters manually (p.98). • You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.104) in the “Information” menu. WAN • Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router) may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the security software or firewall settings appropriately. PC LAN Modem • Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit. • To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended. Router Network cable Mobile device (such as iPod touch and iPhone) TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK HDMI 1 HDMI OUT (NET) HDMI 2 (BD/DVD) IN 1 2 ARC OUT REMOTE OPTICAL AM VIDEO FM (TV) AV4 COMPONENT VIDEO COAXIAL (RADIO) PR ANTENNA AV3 Y PR PB PB AV2 VIDEO VIDEO OPTICAL Y AV 1 MONITOR OUT COMPONENT VIDEO SINGL The unit (rear) AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 ZONE 2 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT ZONE OUT FRONT SURROUND SUR. BAC PRE OUT PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network En 33 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Other connections 8 9 10 7 Connecting other devices Connecting an external power amplifier 4 SUBWOOFER1–2 jacks For connecting a subwoofer with built-in amplifier. When 2 subwoofers are connected, the same sound is output from them. (RX-V775 only) When connecting an external power amplifier (pre-main amplifier) to enhance speaker output, connect the input jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit. The same channel signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Caution • To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making connections. 5 CENTER jack Outputs center channel sounds. Connecting recording devices You can connect video/audio recording devices to the AV OUT jacks. These jacks output analog video/audio signals selected as the input. – Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them. – When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. – When using an external amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, do not connect other devices (except the unit) to the amplifier. • To copy video/audio from a video device, connect the video device to the AV 5–6 jacks of the unit. • To copy audio from an audio device, connect the audio device to the AV 5–6 jacks or AUDIO 1–2 jacks of the unit. • Be sure to use the AV OUT jacks only for connecting recording devices. Video/audio input The unit (rear) AV OUT jacks The unit (rear) HDMI 1 HDMI OUT HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 VIDEO HDMI 5 (BD/DVD) 2 EXTRA SP ZONE2/F.PRESENCE DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK HDMI 1 HDMI OUT (NET) 1 HDMI 2 HDMI V V (BD/DVD) 2 ARC AM FM L COMPONENT VIDEO (RADIO) AM VIDEO CAL FM (TV) AV4 PR ANTENNA XIAL (RADIO) SPEAKERS L R R R PR ANTENNA PB L COMPONENT VIDEO Video recording device AV3 VIDEO FRONT CENTER SURROUND Y SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP PR PB CENTER PB Y AV2 VIDEO VIDEO CAL MONITOR OUT SINGLE 1 CENT AUDIO AV OUT Y SINGLE AV 1 MONITOR OUT COMPONENT VIDEO SINGLE 1 2 ZONE 2 AV 6 AV OUT ZONE OUT FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK PRE OUT 2 SUBWOOFER AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 ZONE 2 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT ZONE OUT FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK PRE OUT SUBWO 12 345 1 FRONT jacks Output front channel sounds. 2 SURROUND jacks L L R R Audio recording device AUDIO Output surround channel sounds. 3 SUR. BACK jacks Audio input Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one external amplifier for the surround back channel, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting other devices En 34 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Other connections 8 Power cable connection 9 10 Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function 8 Connecting the power cable The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the trigger function by connecting the external device to the TRIGGER OUT jack. Before connecting the power cable (General model only) Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage. Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz. TRIGGER OUT jack • Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a potential fire hazard. TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK HDMI OUT (NET) IN 1 2 ARC OUT REMOTE OPTICAL AM VIDEO System connection input (TV) AV4 COAXIAL The unit (rear) (RADIO) ANTENNA VOLTAGE SELECTOR AV3 Y PR PB VOLTAGE SELECTOR AV2 VIDEO OPTICAL AV 1 220V240V COMPONENT VIDEO EXTRA SP ZONE2/F.PRESENCE 110V120V AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT Yamaha subwoofer that supports a system connection UND The unit (rear) SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP SINGLE • You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output” (p.101) in the “Setup” menu. After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable. The unit (rear) To an AC wall outlet 5 EXTRA SP ZONE2/F.PRESENCE SPEAKERS CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP SINGLE PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the power cable En 35 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Language setting 10 RECEIVER SOURCE RECEIVER z 9 Selecting an on-screen menu language HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 Select the desired on-screen menu language from English (default), Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese. V-AUX AV 1 2 3 4 AUDIO 5 6 1 TUNER USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 2 HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN 1 2 Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit. 3 4 Press ON SCREEN. 5 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired language. OPTION Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). 6 7 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. • The information on the front display is provided in English only. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 8 MEMORY 10 ENT TV INPUT TV VO VOLL MUTE TTVV CH CODE SET PREPARATIONS ➤ Selecting an on-screen menu language En 36 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Automatic speaker setup RECEIVER SOURCE RECEIVER z 10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 V-AUX AV 1 2 3 4 AUDIO 5 6 1 TUNER USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 2 The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room. 4 Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your ears) and connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel. YPAO MIC jack HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO The unit (front) YPAO MIC • The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control) technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically designed for acoustic perfection. VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION • Please note the following when using YPAO. 1 – Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to the unit. – During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume. Ensure that the test tones do not frighten small children. Also, refrain from using this function at night when it may be a nuisance to others. ENTER RETURN DISPLAY – During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume. BAND – During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible. 9 2 3 MODE TUNING – Do not connect headphones. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 4 7 8 MEMORY 9 10 0 4 1 2 Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit. 3 Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to maximum. ENT Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). YPAO 5 microphone Ear height TV INPUT TV VO VOLL MUTE TTVV CH CODE SET VOLUME MIN MAX CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT MIN Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can use the tripod screws to stabilize the microphone. 9 MAX • If you are using bi-amp connection or Zone2 speakers, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.91) in the “Setup” menu to the appropriate setting before starting YPAO. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 37 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Automatic speaker setup The following screen appears on the TV. RECEIVER HDMI 1 5 RECEIVER SOURCE 2 3 (RX-V675) 4 5 (RX-V775 only) If desired, change the measuring method (multi/single). a Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” and press ENTER. V-AUX AV 1 2 3 5 6 1 b Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER. 4 AUDIO TUNER MAIN USB 2 NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO VOLUME (RX-V775) POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Settings OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Yes Select this option if you will have several listening positions or if you want others to enjoy surround sound. You can take measurements at up to 8 different positions in the room. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit the area defined by those positions (multi measure). No (default) Select this option if your listening position will always be fixed. Take the measurements at only one position. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit that position (single measure). BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT (RX-V675) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY 9 10 0 ENT TV INPUT TV VO VOLL MUTE This completes the preparations. See “Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.39) to start the measurement. TTVV CH CODE SET • If the cursor keys do not work, the remote control may be set to operate external devices. In this case, press RECEIVER and then use the cursor keys. (RX-V775) Proceed to Step 5. • To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting the measurement. • To configure the power amplifier assignment setting, press RETURN and select “Manual Setup” (p.91). • If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to enjoy surround sound in a wider space. • If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening position you will be seated most frequently. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 38 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Automatic speaker setup RECEIVER SOURCE Single measure Multi measure (5 listening positions) HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 Follow the procedure below for measurement. V-AUX AV 1 2 3 Measuring at one listening position (single measure) 4 AUDIO 5 6 1 TUNER USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 2 • Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the measurement process (about 3 minutes). HDMI OUT a SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU d e bac • Move to the corner of the room or leave the room. 1 RADIO To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Measure” and press ENTER. VOLUME Multi measure Multi measure (1 listening position + front/back/left/right) (2 listening positions + front/back) POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the measurement immediately. • To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN. Cursor keys ENTER RETURN The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement finishes. BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 b c a e d c a b d 4 8 MEMORY 10 ENT TV INPUT TV VO VOLL MUTE TTVV CH CODE SET This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the measurement. When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”: “Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) (RX-V775 only)” (p.40) When “Multi Position” is set to “No”: “Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.39) PREPARATIONS ➤ • If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error messages” (p.43) or “Warning messages” (p.44). • To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking the measurement results” (p.41). Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 39 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Automatic speaker setup RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 V-AUX AV 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and press ENTER. 3 To save the measurement results, use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER. 4 5 1 2 3 4 AUDIO 5 6 1 TUNER USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 2 TV NET When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for measurement. • Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the measurement process. It takes about 10 minutes to measure 8 listening positions. HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) (RX-V775 only) • Move to the corner of the room or leave the room. RADIO • If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error messages” (p.43) or “Warning messages” (p.44). PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME 1 TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the measurement immediately. OPTION The adjusted speaker settings are applied. ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN • To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”. BAND • To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN. MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 9 0 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 7 4 To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Measure” and press ENTER. The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement at the first position finishes. Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. This completes optimization of the speaker settings. 4 8 Caution MEMORY 10 ENT TV INPUT TV VO VOLL MUTE TTVV CH CODE SET • The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on top of AV equipment). 2 Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening position and press ENTER. Repeat step 2 until measurements at all listening positions (up to 8) have been taken. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Automatic speaker setup 3 RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 V-AUX AV 1 2 3 5 6 1 TUNER USB NET When you have taken measurements at 8 listening positions, the following screen appears automatically. 4 AUDIO MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 When the measurements at the positions you want to measure are completed, use the cursor keys to select “CANCEL” and press ENTER. 2 HDMI OUT 6 Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. This completes optimization of the speaker settings. Caution • The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on top of AV equipment). SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO Checking the measurement results PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME You can check the YPAO measurement results. TOP MENU 1 POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN • To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking the measurement results” (p.41). DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET 4 Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and press ENTER. 5 To save the measurement result, use the cursor keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 After the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Result” and press ENTER. • You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.89) in the “Setup” menu, which displays the previous measurement results. The following screen appears. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT MEMORY 10 ENT 1 TV 2 INPUT TV VO VOLL MUTE TTVV CH CODE SET 3 1 Measurement result items 2 Measurement result details 3 The number of measured positions (when multi measure is performed) * RX-V775 only The adjusted speaker settings are applied. • To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Automatic speaker setup 2 RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 Wiring Polarity of each speaker Normal: The speaker cable is connected with the correct polarity (+/-). Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity (+/-). Size Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the subwoofer) Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. Distance Distance from the listening position to each speaker Level Output level adjustment for each speaker V-AUX AV 1 2 3 5 6 1 4 AUDIO TUNER MAIN USB 2 NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments Use the cursor keys to select an item. TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings and reload the previous YPAO adjustments. 1 In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto Setup”, and then “Result” (p.88). 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and press ENTER. 3 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 9 0 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 7 Cursor keys ENTER RETURN • A speaker with a problem is indicated with a message enclosed in a red box. 3 To finish checking the results and return to the previous screen, press RETURN. 4 8 MEMORY 10 ENT TV INPUT TV VO VOLL MUTE TTVV CH CODE SET PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 42 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Automatic speaker setup Error messages If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again. Error message Cause E-1: No Front SP Front speakers are not detected. E-2: No Sur. SP One of the surround speakers cannot be detected. E-3: No F.PRNS SP One of the presence speakers cannot be detected. E-4: SBR → SBL A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only. When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker. E-5: Noisy The noise is too loud. Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select “PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected. E-6: Check Sur. Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround speakers are connected. Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers. E-7: No MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. E-8: No Signal The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. E-9: User Cancel The measurement has been canceled. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”. An internal error has occurred. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. E-10: Internal Error Remedy Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 43 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Automatic speaker setup Warning messages If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions. However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings. Warning message Cause Remedy W-1: Out of Phase A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity (+/-). Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.41) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by “Reverse”. If the speaker is connected incorrectly, turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable. Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message. W-2: Over Distance A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening position. Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.41) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80 ft) of the listening position. W-3: Level Error There are significant volume differences between the speakers. Check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as possible. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 44 PLAYBACK RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 V-AUX AV 1 2 3 4 Input selection keys Basic playback procedure AUDIO 5 6 1 TUNER USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 2 1 Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or BD/DVD player) connected to the unit. 2 Use the input selection keys to select an input source. 3 Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. HDMI OUT HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN MUTE VOLUME ON SCREEN For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages. Cursor keys ENTER RETURN DISPLAY • Listening to FM/AM radio (p.53) BAND MODE TUNING • Playing back iPod music (p.58) PRESET • Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.62) SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT • Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.65) MEMORY 9 10 0 ENT • Listening to Internet radio (p.68) TV INPUT TV VO VOLL MUTE 1 Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack. Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be used for signal output changes. VOL. HDMIOUT1+2 SW C L R SL SR SBL SBR Refer to the instruction manual for the external device. OPTION ENTER Selecting an HDMI output jack (RX-V775 only) • Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) (p.70) TTVV CH CODE SET 4 HDMI OUT 1+2 Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 jacks. HDMI OUT 1 Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack. HDMI OUT 2 HDMI OUT Off Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks. • You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.46). • When “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest resolution supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.) Press VOLUME to adjust the volume. • To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute. • To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or TONE CONTROL on the front panel (p.79). On-screen input selection a Press ON SCREEN. b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER. c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and press ENTER. PLAYBACK ➤ Basic playback procedure En 45 SOURCE RECEIVER SOURCE Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 V-AUX AV 1 2 3 5 6 1 4 TUNER USB NET Input selection keys AUDIO MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, Compressed Music Enhancer on/off, and HDMI output jack (RX-V775 only) with just one touch. 2 1 HDMI OUT TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN SCENE SCENE Input Sound program BD/DVD HDMI 1 MOVIE (Sci-Fi) Off HDMI OUT 1+2 TV AV 4 STRAIGHT On HDMI OUT 1+2 NET NET RADIO MUSIC (7ch Stereo) On HDMI OUT 1+2 RADIO TUNER MUSIC (7ch Stereo) On HDMI OUT 1+2 ENTER • Select a sound program (p.47) • Enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.52) HDMI output jack (RX-V775 only) • (RX-V775 only) Selecting an HDMI output jack (p.45) 2 Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display. VOL. DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE Compressed Music Enhancer Perform the following operations to prepare the settings you want to assign to a scene. • Select an input source (p.45) By default, the following settings are registered for each scene. OPTION RETURN 1 The input source and settings registered to the corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on automatically when it is in standby mode. SCENE BD DVD Press SCENE. Configuring scene assignments MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 9 0 3 7 4 8 MEMORY 10 ENT SETComplete 3 SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR If you want to control the corresponding playback device after selecting the scene, hold down the corresponding SCENE key and input selection key together for more than 3 seconds. TV INPUT TV VO VOLL MUTE Once the setting is completed successfully, SOURCE blinks twice. TTVV CH CODE SET • If you have not registered the remote control code of the playback device yet, see “Registering the remote control codes for playback devices” (p.109) to register it. • You can also configure scene assignments in the “Scene” menu (p.83). • The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external device connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify the device type in “Device Control” (p.84) in the “Scene” menu. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 46 Selecting the sound mode RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo playback). V-AUX AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 AUDIO TUNER MAIN USB 2 NET PARTY ZONE 2 ❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for movies HDMI OUT • Press MOVIE repeatedly. SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN PROGRAM ON SCREEN OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN ❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for music or stereo playback b Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press ENTER. c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround decoder and press ENTER. TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 9 0 3 7 4 8 MEMORY 10 ENT TV • The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source. • When you play back audio signals with a sampling rate of higher than 96 kHz, the straight decode mode (p.51) is automatically selected. • You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.10) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in the “Information” menu (p.103). • Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly. This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from 2-channel sources (p.51). ❑ Switching to the straight decode mode • Press STRAIGHT. INPUT TV VO VOLL MOVIE MUSIC SUR.DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT • You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in the “Sound Program” menu (p.85). This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening music sources or stereo playback (p.50). ❑ Selecting a surround decoder BAND • You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing PROGRAM. • Press MUSIC repeatedly. DISPLAY MODE MUTE a Press ON SCREEN. This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games (p.49). PROGRAM MOVIE On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection TTVV CH CODE SET This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels (p.51). ❑ Switching to the Pure Direct mode • Press PURE DIRECT. This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the electrical noise from other circuitry (p.52). ❑ Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer • Press ENHANCER. This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth and breadth (p.52). PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 47 Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP technology (CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound fields. You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program or a surround decoder. Sound program category “CINEMA DSP n” lights up VOL. 3 Hall in Vienna PL L SL SW C PR R SR Sound program • To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.79) in the “Option” menu to “Off”. • We recommend using presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the stereoscopic sound fields. However, even when no presence speakers are connected, the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce stereoscopic sound fields. ■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, the unit utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround technology to reproduce up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the well-oriented sound field only with the front-side speakers. We recommend using presence speakers in order to enjoy more effective stereoscopic sound field. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 48 ■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE) ❑ ENTERTAINMENT The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games. Sports This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’ voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of the fans in a suitable space. Action Game This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field. Roleplaying Game This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field. Music Video This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. ❑ MOVIE THEATER Standard This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio, such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right, and rear. Spectacle This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms. Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music. Adventure This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides, powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation of the sounds and the separation of the channels. Drama This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for long periods. Mono Movie This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies, in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate reverberation to the original audio. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 49 ■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback (MUSIC) The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources. You can also select stereo playback. ❑ CLASSICAL Hall in Munich This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500 seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena. Hall in Vienna This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound. Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. ❑ LIVE/CLUB Cellar Club This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small stage. The Roxy Theatre This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. The Bottom Line This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. ❑ STEREO 2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP). 7ch Stereo Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties. • CINEMA DSP 3D (p.48) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.48) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo” is selected. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 50 Enjoying unprocessed playback RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 You can play back input sources without any sound field effect processing. 4 5 V-AUX AV 1 2 3 5 6 1 4 TUNER USB NET ■ Playing back in original channels (straight decode) AUDIO MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 2 HDMI OUT When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for multichannel sources. SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO ■ Playing back 2-channel sources in multichannel (surround decoder) The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel playback from 2-channel sources. When a multichannel source is input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode. For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.123). 1 Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder. Each time you press the key, the surround decoder changes. VOL. VOLUME 1 POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Press STRAIGHT. ProLogic Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is enabled or disabled. OPTION bPro Logic ENTER L SL SW C R SR Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all sources. VOL. RETURN STRAIGHT DISPLAY BAND SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR MODE TUNING bPLII Music SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 9 0 STRAIGHT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 7 4 INPUT TV VO VOLL bPLIIx Game Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for music. bPLII Game Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for games. Neo:6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for movies. Neo:6 Music Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for music. ENT TV MUTE • To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround back speakers are used, set “Extended Surround” (p.80) in the “Option” menu to a setting other than “Off”. Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for movies. 8 MEMORY 10 bPLII Movie bPLIIx Music SUR.DECODE PRESET bPLIIx Movie TTVV CH CODE SET • You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are connected or when “Surround Back” in the “Setup” menu is set to “None”. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 51 Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality. 4 5 V-AUX AV 1 2 3 5 6 1 4 TUNER USB NET AUDIO MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 2 1 HDMI OUT TV NET Press PURE DIRECT. Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is enabled or disabled. SCENE BD DVD RADIO VOL. PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME PUREDIRECT SW C L R SL SR SBL SBR POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along with any other sound modes. 1 Press ENHANCER. Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer is enabled or disabled. “ENHANCER” lights up OPTION • When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available. ENTER – Some settings for the speakers or sound programs RETURN DISPLAY – Operating the on-screen and “Option” menus BAND – Using the multi-zone function MODE TUNING PURE DIRECT SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY 9 10 0 SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR – Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation) MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO Enhancer On VOL. – Output from the AV OUT jacks PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE ENHANCER ENT TV • Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz. ENHANCER • You can also use “Enhancer” (p.80) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer. INPUT TV VO VOLL MUTE TTVV CH CODE SET PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 52 Listening to FM/AM radio RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from registered radio stations. V-AUX AV 1 2 3 5 6 1 TUNER USB NET 4 AUDIO MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 2 HDMI OUT • The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used in U.K. and Europe models. RADIO • If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM antennas. TUNER SCENE BD DVD TV Selecting a frequency for reception NET 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM). VOL. PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU Setting the frequency steps VOLUME (Asia and General models only) POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and 9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM. OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND BAND MODE TUNING PRESET TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC 1 2 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Set the unit to standby mode. When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z. MAIN ZONE z 10 0 3 SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR Use the following keys to set a frequency. TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the key for about a second to search stations automatically. Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT). VOL. STEREO TUNED FM98.50MHz SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. Numeric keys MEMORY 9 FM87.50MHz ENT TV “STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received. INPUT TV VO VOLL MUTE TTVV CH CODE SET PROGRAM 3 STRAIGHT Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TU”. TUFM50/AM9 4 5 • “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of reception range. • You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.80) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it. Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”. Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 53 Registering favorite radio stations (presets) RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their preset numbers. 4 5 V-AUX AV 1 2 3 4 ■ Selecting a preset station Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number. 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio station. AUDIO 5 6 1 TUNER USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 2 TUNER HDMI OUT • You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using “Auto Preset” (p.57). SCENE BD DVD TV NET You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once. ■ Registering a radio station RADIO Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number. PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN VOL. STEREO TUNED SW C L R SL SR SBL SBR 1 Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.53) to tune into the desired radio station. 2 Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds. • “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered. The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most recently registered number. • “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered. 01:FM98.50MHz OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY 9 PRESET 10 0 ENT • “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered. • To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.57). VOL. STEREO TUNED Numeric keys MEMORY 01:FM98.50MHz SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR TV INPUT TV VO VOLL MUTE Preset number TTVV CH CODE SET • To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again. VOL. STEREO TUNED 02:Empty SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR “Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 54 Radio Data System tuning RECEIVER SOURCE • “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System service. HDMI 1 2 3 (U.K. and Europe models only) 4 5 Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station. V-AUX AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 AUDIO TUNER MAIN USB 2 NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT ■ Displaying the Radio Data System information SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO VOLUME 1 POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY OPTION Cursor keys ENTER RETURN BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO 3 4 7 8 Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. • We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (p.57). 2 Press INFO. ■ Receiving traffic information automatically When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function, follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station. 1 When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program” (TrafficProgram) and press ENTER. The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the search immediately. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. INFO VOL. STEREO TUNED SW C L R SL SR SBL SBR ProgramType • To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed. • To cancel the search, press RETURN. • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. Item name MEMORY 9 10 0 ENT TV INPUT TV VO VOLL MUTE TTVV CH CODE SET About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. 9850 VOL. STEREO TUNED CLASSICS SW C L R SL SR SBL SBR The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the search finishes. FINISH VOL. STEREO TUNED TPFM101.30MHz SW C L R SL SR SBL SBR Traffic information station (frequency) Information Program Service Program service name Program Type Current program type Radio Text Information on the current program Clock Time Current time DSP Program Sound mode name Audio Decoder Decoder name Frequency Frequency • “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information stations are found. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 55 Operating the radio on the TV RECEIVER SOURCE Menu HDMI 1 2 3 You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the TV. 4 5 V-AUX Submenu Function FM (U.K. and Europe models only) Switches to FM/AM. AM AV 1 2 3 5 6 1 4 1 AUDIO TUNER MAIN USB 2 TUNER NET PARTY ZONE 2 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. Manual Tuning The playback screen is displayed on the TV. HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE ■ Playback screen RADIO VOLUME 1 TOP MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Selects a frequency. Auto (+/-) Selects a radio station automatically. Memory Registers the selected station as presets. Direct Enters a frequency directly. Browse Moves to the browse screen (preset station list). Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 3 2 POP-UP/MENU Tuning (+/-) 4 Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY 9 10 0 ENT TV INPUT TV VO VOLL MUTE TTVV CH CODE SET 1 Radio station information Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected band (FM/AM) and frequency. (U.K. and Europe models only) When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.55), the Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed. 2 Band icon (Except for U.K. and Europe models) Select this icon and press ENTER to switch between FM and AM. 3 TUNED/STEREO indicators “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. “STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received. 4 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 56 ■ Browse screen RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 1 V-AUX AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 TUNER USB NET AUDIO MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 3 2 HDMI OUT 2 SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Preset station list PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys to select a preset station and press ENTER to tune into it. 2 Preset number POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND 3 Operation menu Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Submenu Function Memory Registers the current station to the preset number selected in the list. Auto Preset Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong signals (up to 40 stations). Clear Preset Clear the preset station selected in the list. Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations. MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 4 7 8 Utility MEMORY 9 10 0 ENT TV INPUT TV VO VOLL MUTE TTVV CH CODE SET 1 Page Up 1 Page Down Moves to the previous/next page of the list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • (U.K. and Europe models only) Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto Preset”. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 57 Playing back iPod music You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable supplied with the iPod. Connecting an iPod Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the iPod. • An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or software version of the iPod. • To play back iPod videos on the unit, an Apple Composite AV Cable (not supplied) is required. Connect the USB and composite video plugs of the Apple Composite AV cable to the USB jack and VIDEO jack on the front panel. To select a video, operate the iPod itself in the simple play mode (p.60). 1 Connect the USB cable to the iPod. 2 Connect the USB cable to the USB jack. Supported iPod (as of February 2013) • iPod touch (1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th generation) • iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th generation) • iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone • iPad (3rd generation), iPad 2, iPad The unit (front) VOLUME RADIO STRAIGHT VIDEO AUX HDMI/ MHL 5V 1A USB VIDEO 5V 2.1A VOL. Connected SW C L R SL SR SBL SBR • The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If “Network Standby” (p.98) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to change without limit. • Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 58 Playback of iPod content RECEIVER SOURCE ■ Browse screen HDMI 1 2 3 V-AUX AV 1 2 3 5 6 1 1 2 3 Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start playback. 4 5 You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 4 AUDIO TUNER MAIN USB 2 USB NET PARTY ZONE 2 1 5 Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. HDMI OUT 4 SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.61) and playback status (such as play/pause). 2 List name POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION 3 Contents list ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 4 Item number/total MODE TUNING • If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY 10 ENT 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. 5 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Function 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down TV INPUT TV VO VOLL MUTE TTVV CH 10 Pages Up CODE SET Moves 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the simple play mode (p.60). PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 59 ■ Playback screen RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 1 2 4 5 V-AUX AV 1 2 3 ■ Operating the iPod itself or remote control (simple play) 1 4 5 6 TUNER MAIN 1 USB 3 2 NET PARTY ZONE 2 To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again. HDMI OUT 2 SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.61) and playback status (such as play/pause). 2 Playback information POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 9 0 3 7 External device operation keys MODE Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining time. Use the cursor keys to select scrollable information. 10 Operational remote control keys Function Cursor keys Select an item. ENTER Confirms the selection. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. a Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. Menu 4 8 External device operation keys d Starts playback or stops playback temporarily. s Stops playback. Submenu Function a Resumes playback from pause. g s Stops playback. h d Stops playback temporarily. j f ENT TV INPUT TV VOL Operate your iPod itself or the remote control to start playback. 3 Operation menu MEMORY MUTE Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode. The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are enabled. AUDIO TV CH CODE SET Play Control Skips forward/backward. Searches forward/backward (by holding down). f g h j Skips forward/backward. Searches forward/backward (by holding down). Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • You can also use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control playback. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 60 ■ Repeat/shuffle settings RECEIVER SOURCE You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings of your iPod. HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 V-AUX AV 1 2 3 5 6 1 • During simple play, configure the repeat/shuffle settings directly on your iPod or press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below. 4 AUDIO TUNER MAIN USB 2 NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT 1 When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO VOLUME POP-UP/MENU • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY OPTION Cursor keys ENTER RETURN BAND MODE MODE TUNING • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item PRESET Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. Songs (Songs) Plays back songs in random order. “x” appears in the TV screen. Albums (Albums) Plays back albums in random order. “x” appears in the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears in the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs repeatedly. “v” appears in the TV screen. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Shuffle (Shuffle) MEMORY 9 10 0 ENT TV INPUT TV VO VOLL MUTE TTVV CH CODE SET Repeat (Repeat) 4 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 61 Playing back music stored on a USB storage device RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on the unit. Refer to the instruction manuals for the USB storage device for more information. V-AUX AV 1 2 3 4 AUDIO 5 6 1 TUNER USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 2 USB The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or FAT32 format). HDMI OUT • Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack. • Disconnect the USB storage device from the USB jack when it is not in use. SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU • If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display. RADIO VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION • The unit supports WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC files (1- or 2-channel audio only). • The unit is compatible with sampling rate of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC files, and 48 kHz for other files. • Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of the USB storage device. • Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back. ENTER Connecting a USB storage device RETURN • You cannot connect the PC to the USB jack of the unit. Playback of USB storage device contents Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device contents and start playback. You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed on the TV screen. DISPLAY BAND 1 MODE TUNING PRESET Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. The unit (front) RADIO MEMORY 9 10 0 ENT STRAIGHT VIDEO AUX TV INPUT TV VO VOLL MUTE TTVV CH CODE SET HDMI/ MHL 5V 1A VIDEO 5V 2.1A • If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is displayed. USB storage device USB Connected VOL. SW C L R SL SR SBL SBR PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 62 2 RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 AV 2 3 5 6 1 TUNER USB NET 1 2 3 If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. V-AUX 1 ■ Browse screen Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. 4 AUDIO MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 5 2 HDMI OUT 4 SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME 2 List name POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING 3 Contents list Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. • If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. 4 Item number/total 5 Operation menu PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.64) and playback status (such as play/pause). MUSIC Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Menu Moves to the previous/next page of the list. MEMORY 10 ENT TV Function 1 Page Up 1 Page Down INPUT TV VO VOLL MUTE TTVV CH CODE SET 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 63 ■ Playback screen RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 V-AUX AV 1 2 3 5 6 1 You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for playback of USB storage device contents. 1 2 4 5 ■ Repeat/shuffle settings 4 AUDIO TUNER MAIN USB 3 2 1 When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND OPTION Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT 3 Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys to select scrollable information. Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. Menu Play Control Submenu Function a Resumes playback from pause. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. Shuffle (Shuffle) Repeat (Repeat) TV f INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH CODE SET g Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item 3 Operation menu ENHANCER PURE DIRECT MEMORY • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. 2 Playback information POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.64) and playback status (such as play/pause). Skips forward/backward. Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 4 Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. To exit from the menu, press OPTION. • You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 64 Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 5 6 1 Playback of PC music contents You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit. V-AUX AV 4 Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and start playback. AUDIO TUNER MAIN USB 2 HDMI OUT • To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.33). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.104) in the “Information” menu. RADIO • The unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC files (1- or 2-channel audio only). NET NET PARTY ZONE 2 SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE • The unit is compatible with sampling rates of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC files, and 48 kHz for other files. VOLUME You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 1 The browse screen is displayed on the TV. • To play back FLAC files, you need to install server software that supports sharing of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files. TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING Media sharing setup To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each music server. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 9 0 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 7 4 8 MEMORY 10 ENT TV ■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed 1 INPUT TV VO VOLL MUTE Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the input source. TTVV CH Check that Windows Media Player 11 or later is installed on your PC. CODE SET 2 In the media sharing settings, enable media sharing and allow media to be shared with the device. • If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the playback screen is displayed. 2 Use the cursor keys to select a music server and press ENTER. ■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software installed Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media sharing settings. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 65 3 RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 AV 2 3 5 6 1 TUNER USB NET ■ Browse screen 1 2 3 If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. V-AUX 1 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. 4 AUDIO MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 5 2 HDMI OUT 4 SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME OPTION 3 Contents list ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. • Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. • If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. 4 Item number/total 5 Operation menu PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO 2 List name POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN MOVIE Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.67) and playback status (such as play/pause). Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Menu Moves to the previous/next page of the list. MEMORY 10 ENT TV Function 1 Page Up 1 Page Down INPUT TV VO VOLL MUTE TTVV CH CODE SET 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 66 ■ Playback screen RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 V-AUX AV 1 2 3 5 6 1 You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for the playback of PC music content. 1 2 4 5 ■ Repeat/shuffle settings 4 AUDIO TUNER MAIN USB 3 2 1 When “SERVER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME 2 Playback information POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND OPTION Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys to select scrollable information. Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. Menu 10 ENT Play Control • Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. 3 Submenu Function a Resumes playback from pause. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. Shuffle (Shuffle) Repeat (Repeat) TV f INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH CODE SET g Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item 3 Operation menu ENHANCER PURE DIRECT MEMORY • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.67) and playback status (such as play/pause). Skips forward/backward. Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 4 Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. To exit from the menu, press OPTION. • You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. • You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.83). PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 67 Listening to Internet radio RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world. V-AUX You can control the Internet radio with the menu displayed on the TV screen. AV 1 2 3 4 AUDIO 5 6 1 TUNER USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 2 TV NET Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. NET HDMI OUT • To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.33). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.104) in the “Information” menu. SCENE BD DVD 1 RADIO • You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations. • The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service. PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME • This service may be discontinued without notice. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 8 MEMORY 10 ENT TV INPUT TV VO VOLL MUTE TTVV CH CODE SET • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 68 ■ Browse screen RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 V-AUX AV 1 2 3 5 6 1 TUNER USB NET ■ Playback screen 4 1 2 AUDIO MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT 4 SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO VOLUME RETURN DISPLAY BAND Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 2 Playback information 4 Item number/total 5 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Function 4 7 8 10 0 Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. Menu Submenu Function Play Control s Stops playback. Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. ENT TV 10 Pages Down INPUT TV VOL 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 3 MEMORY MUTE 2 List name MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 9 1 Playback indicator Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. OPTION ENTER 1 Playback indicator 3 Contents list POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN MOVIE 3 5 2 TV CH CODE SET Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • You can also use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to stop playback. • Some information may not be available depending on the station. • You can register your favorite Internet radio stations to the “Bookmarks” folder by selecting “NET RADIO” as the input source on the unit and then accessing the following website with the web browser on your PC. To use this feature, you need the vTuner ID of the unit and your e-mail address to create your personal account. You can check the vTunerID (MAC address of the unit) in “Network” (p.104) in the “Information” menu. http://yradio.vtuner.com/ PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 69 Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network. Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit. iTunes PC 1 Router The unit Starts playback on iTunes or iPod Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback screen on the iPod. If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon ( ) appears. iTunes (example) iPod (example) Playback starts iPod • To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router (p.33). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.104) in the “Information” menu. Supported iTunes/iPod (as of February 2013) • If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly. 2 • iTunes 10.2.2 or later (Windows/Mac) On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit (network name of the unit) as the audio output device. • iPod touch, iPhone or iPad with iOS 4.3.3 or later iTunes (example) iPod (example) Network name of the unit 3 Select a song and start playback. The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback. The playback screen is displayed on the TV. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) En 70 Menu RECEIVER SOURCE • The playback screen is available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 V-AUX Play Control AV 1 2 3 5 6 1 4 • You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by setting “Network Standby” (p.98) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. AUDIO TUNER MAIN USB 2 • You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.99) in the “Setup” menu. NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT TV NET PROGRAM MUTE RADIO • You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.83) in the “Input” menu to “Off”. VOLUME Caution TOP MENU Function a Resumes playback from pause. d Stops playback temporarily. f g Screen Off • If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the iTunes/iPod stops automatically. SCENE BD DVD Submenu Skips forward/backward. Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 • When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod immediately. iTunes (example of English version) ■ Playback screen 1 2 4 8 3 MEMORY 10 • To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to configure the iTunes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers in advance. ENT TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH CODE SET Check this box 1 Playback indicator 2 Playback information Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) En 71 Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room where the unit is installed (Main zone) and in another room (Zone2). For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (Main zone), another person can listen to radio in the study room (Zone2). Preparing Zone2 Connect the device that will be used in Zone2 to the unit. The connection method varies depending on the amplifier being used (the unit or an external amplifier). Caution • Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers or an external amplifier. • Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on. Study room (Zone2) Living room (Main zone) • Analog audio sources (including FM/AM radio), and USB and network sources can be output to Zone2. To listen to the playback of an external device in Zone2, you need to connect the device to the AUDIO jacks (AV 5–6 or AUDIO 1–2 jacks) of the unit. • (RX-V775 only) The party mode (p.76) allows you to play back the same audio output in Main zone as Zone2, whatever the input audio signal type. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 72 ■ Using the unit’s internal amplifier ■ Using an external amplifier Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to the unit with speaker cables. Connect the external amplifier (with volume control) placed in Zone2 to the unit with a stereo pin cable. To utilize the EXTRA SP terminals for Zone2 speakers, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.91) in the “Setup” menu to “7ch +1ZONE” after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet. The unit (rear) DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK HDMI 1 HDMI OUT (NET) 1 (BD/DVD) 2 ARC EXTRA SP ZONE2/F.PRESENCE AM VIDEO PTICAL FM (TV) AV4 CO OAXIAL (RADIO) ANTENNA AV3 The unit (rear) Y ZONE2 OUT jacks PR PB AV2 SPEAKERS FRONT CENTER VIDEO VIDEO PTICAL SURROUND SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP AV 1 MONITOR COMPONENT VIDEO L SINGLE R AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 ZONE 2 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT F ZONE OUT External amplifier Audio input (analog stereo) ZONE 2 ZONE OUT 1 2 FL FR L Q 9 W R 3 1 4 9 5 6 7 2 3 4 Zone2 AUDIO 5 6 7 Zone2 Main zone Main zone • When Zone2 output is enabled (p.75), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 73 ■ Operating the unit from Zone2 (remote connection) Remote connections between Yamaha products You can operate the unit and external devices from Zone2 using the supplied remote control if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s REMOTE IN/OUT jacks. An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using Yamaha products that support remote connections, as the unit does. You can transmit remote control signals by connecting the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an infrared signal receiver. REMOTE IN/OUT jacks • To operate external devices with the supplied remote control, you must register a remote control code for each device before using (p.108). REMOTE IN/OUT jacks DC OUT 5V 0.5A IN NETWORK 1 2 ARC REMOTE REMOTE OPTICAL (TV) AV4 COAXIAL REMOTE Yamaha products (up to six, including the unit) AM VIDEO IN OUT Infrared signal receiver HDMI OUT (NET) OUT OUT IN OUT REMOTE IN TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A REMOTE IN/OUT jacks (RADIO) ANTENNA AV3 Y PR PB AV2 VIDEO OPTICAL AV 1 Remote control COMPONENT VIDEO AUDIO 2 AUDIO 1 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT Zone2 The unit (rear) Infrared signal transmitter Infrared signal receiver External device (such as a CD player) Remote control Zone2 Main zone PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 74 RECEIVER SOURCE RECEIVER z Controlling Zone2 4 HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 V-AUX AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 AUDIO TUNER MAIN USB 2 NET PARTY ZONE 2 AV 5–6 AUDIO 1–2 TUNER USB NET 1 2 HDMI OUT MAIN/ZONE2 TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO VOLUME MUTE VOLUME Set MAIN/ZONE2 to “ZONE2”. Refer to the instruction manual for the external device. Press RECEIVER z. For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages. Each time you press the key, Zone2 output is enabled or disabled. • Listening to FM/AM radio (p.53) • Playing back iPod music (p.58) When Zone2 output is enabled, “ZONE2” lights up in the front display. SCENE BD DVD 3 • Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.62) Use the following keys to select an input source. AV 5–6: AV 5–6 (AUDIO) jacks • Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.65) AUDIO 1–2: AUDIO 1–2 jacks • Listening to Internet radio (p.68) TUNER: FM/AM radio • Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) (p.70) POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER USB: USB jack (on the front panel) RETURN NET: NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a desired network source) DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET PHONO: PHONO jacks (RX-V775 only [except for U.S.A. and Canada models]) SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 9 0 Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. • The on-screen operations are not available for Zone2. Use the front display to control Zone2. • AirPlay is available in Zone2 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in the main zone. SLEEP 3 7 4 8 MEMORY 10 ENT TV • You cannot select USB and network sources exclusively for each zone. For example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected for the main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to “SERVER”. • To set the sleep timer (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off), press SLEEP repeatedly. The Zone2 output will be disabled after a specified period of time. INPUT TV VO VOLL MUTE TTVV CH CODE SET • To adjust the Zone2 volume, press VOLUME or MUTE (when using the unit’s internal amplifier). When using an external amplifier, use the volume control on it. Caution • To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 75 ■ Enjoying the same source in multiple rooms (party mode) RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 4 (RX-V775 only) 5 V-AUX AV 1 2 3 4 AUDIO 5 6 1 TUNER USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 2 HDMI OUT PARTY The party mode allows you to play back in Zone2 the same music that is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode, stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this function when you want to use main zone music as background music for a house party. SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 1 Press PARTY. Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or off. When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the front display. OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY • If the party mode does not work on Zone2, set “Party Mode Set” (p.100) in the “Setup” menu to “Enable” (default). BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 8 MEMORY 10 ENT TV INPUT TV VO VOLL MUTE TTVV CH CODE SET PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 76 Viewing the current status RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 V-AUX Switching information on the front display AV 1 2 3 4 Input source group Item NET RADIO Song (song title), Album (album name), Station (station name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) PHONO (RX-V775 only [except for U.S.A. and Canada models]) Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) AUDIO 5 6 1 TUNER USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 2 1 HDMI OUT Press INFO. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO VOL. AudioDecoder PROGRAM MUTE L SL SW C R SR VOLUME * The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears. Item name TOP MENU About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER Viewing the status information on the TV VOL. RETURN DISPLAY ProLogic DISPLAY L SL SW C R SR 1 BAND MODE TUNING The following information is displayed on the TV. Information PRESET Press DISPLAY. Compressed Music Enhancer status SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY 10 INPUT TV VO VOLL Input source group Item HDMI 1–5 V-AUX AV 1–6 AUDIO 1–2 Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) Input source/ Party mode status* Volume Audio format/ Decoder Sound mode ENT TV MUTE • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed item can also be applied separately to each input source group. TTVV CH CODE SET Frequency (frequency), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) TUNER USB SERVER AirPlay CINEMA DSP status * (U.K. and Europe models only) Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.55). Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) * RX-V775 only 2 To close the information display, press DISPLAY. * During simple playback of iPod: Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) PLAYBACK ➤ Viewing the current status En 77 Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily configure settings during playback. 1 Press OPTION. Option menu items • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. • Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. OPTION ToneControl VOL. SW C L R SL SR SBL SBR Front display Item Function Page Tone Control (Tone Control) Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of sounds. 79 Adaptive DRC (Adaptive DRC) Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume is adjusted. 79 CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (CINEMA DSP 3D) Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 79 Dialogue Level Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. Dialogue Adjust (Dialog Lvl) (Dialog Adjust) Dialogue Lift Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. (Dialog Lift) TV screen 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 3 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Extended Surround (EXTD Surround) Volume Trim (Volume Trim) Input Trim (In.Trim) 79 79 Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers are used. 80 Corrects volume differences between input sources. 80 Subwoofer Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. Trim (SW.Trim) 80 Enhancer (Enhancer) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 80 Video Mode (Video Mode) Enables/disables the video signal processing settings configured in the “Setup” menu. 80 FM Mode (FM Mode) Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception. 80 Traffic Program (TrafficProgram) (U.K. and Europe models only) Automatically searches for a traffic information station. 55 Repeat (Repeat) Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.61), USB storage device (p.64), or media server (p.67). — Shuffle (Shuffle) Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.61), USB storage device (p.64), or media server (p.67). — PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 78 ■ Tone Control (Tone Control) ■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (CINEMA DSP 3D) Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds. Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.48). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP 3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo). Choices Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass) Settings Setting range -6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass) to +6.0 dB, *0.5 dB increments Default Bypass (Bypass) On (On) (default) Enables CINEMA DSP 3D. Off (Off) Disables CINEMA DSP 3D. ■ Dialogue Adjust (Dialog Adjust) Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds. • If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels. ❑ Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl) Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard clearly, you can turn up its volume by increasing this setting. Adjusting with the front panel controls a Press TONE CONTROL to select “Treble” or “Bass”. Setting range 0 to 3 b Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment. Default 0 ■ Adaptive DRC (Adaptive DRC) Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to playback at a low volume at night. ❑ Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift) Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is coming from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing this setting. Settings On (On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range. Off (Off) (default) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted. • This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met. – One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) is selected when presence speakers are used. If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a high volume. On Off Input level Volume: high Output level Output level Volume: low – Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.48) is working. (You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.) Setting range 0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position) Default 0 On Off Input level Ideal position PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 79 ■ Extended Surround (EXTD Surround) ❑ Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim) Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers are used. Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. Settings Auto (Auto) (default) Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if signals that contain surround back channel signals are input, and reproduces the signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. If two surround back speakers are connected, the unit reproduces the 5.1-channel signals in 7.1-channel. bPLIIx Movie (bPLIIxMo) Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie decoder. This setting is available only when two surround back speakers are connected. bPLIIx Music (bPLIIxMu) Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music decoder. This setting is available only when one or two surround back speakers are connected. EX/ES (EX/ES) Automatically selects the Dolby EX or DTS-ES decoder, and reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. Off (Off) Always reproduces signals in their original channels. (Even when DTS-ES or Dolby Digital Surround EX signal is input, the unit reproduces the signal in 5.1-channel.) • Some early Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS-ES sources do not contain a flag for reproducing surround back channel. We recommend you set “Extended Surround” to “bPLIIx Movie” or “EX/ES” when playing back those sources. Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.52). • This setting is applied separately to each input source. • You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.52). Settings Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer. On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer. Default TUNER, USB, (network sources): On (On) Others: Off (Off) Settings ❑ Input Trim (In.Trim) Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it. Default 0.0 dB ■ Enhancer (Enhancer) Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio) settings configured in “Processing” (p.95) in the “Setup” menu. Fine-adjusts volume difference between input sources or subwoofer volume. Setting range -6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Default 0.0 dB ■ Video Mode (Video Mode) ■ Volume Trim (Volume Trim) • This setting is applied separately to each input source. Setting range -6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Processing (Processing) Enables the video signal processing. Direct (Direct) (default) Disables the video signal processing. ■ FM Mode (FM Mode) Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception. Settings Stereo (Stereo) (default) Receives FM radio in stereo sounds. Mono (Mono) Receives FM radio in monaural sounds. PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 80 CONFIGURATIONS Configuring input sources (Input menu) 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. You can change the input source settings using the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 3 5 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured and press the cursor key (q). Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Input menu items • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The input source of the unit also changes. • You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3. Item Function Rename/Icon Select Changes the input source name and icon. 82 Audio In Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an audio jack of others. 82 Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS. 82 Volume Interlock Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay. 83 Video Out Selects a video to be output with the audio input source. 83 DMC Control Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. 83 CONFIGURATIONS Page ➤ Configuring input sources (Input menu) En 81 ■ Rename/Icon Select ■ Audio In Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen. Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an audio jack of others. For example, use this function in the following cases. Input sources HDMI 1–5, V-AUX, AV 1–6, AUDIO 1–2, USB, PHONO* * RX-V775 only (except for U.S.A. and Canada models) ■ Setup procedure 1 • Connecting a playback device that supports HDMI video output, but not HDMI audio output • Connecting a playback device that has component video jacks and analog stereo jacks (such as game consoles) Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a template and press the cursor key (w). Input sources HDMI 1–5, AV 1–2 ■ Setup procedure (To input audio through a digital optical jack) Select “AV1” or “AV4” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks with a digital optical cable. (To input audio through a digital coaxial jack) Select “AV2” or “AV3” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks with a digital coaxial cable. 2 3 4 • You cannot change the template or icon for “USB” when an iPod is connected. (To input audio through analog audio jacks) Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w). Select “AV5”, “AV6”, “AUDIO1”, or “AUDIO2”, and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks with a stereo pin cable. Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. ■ Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”. For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder Mode” to “DTS”. Input sources HDMI 1–5, V-AUX, AV 1–4 Settings Auto (default) Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal. DTS Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.) • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 5 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 6 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring input sources (Input menu) En 82 ■ Volume Interlock Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay. Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.46) using the TV screen. Input sources AirPlay Settings Off Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod. Limited (default) Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range (-80 dB to 0 dB and mute). Full Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to +16.5 dB and mute). 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and press the cursor key (q). Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER. ■ Video Out Selects a video to be output with the audio input source. Input sources TUNER, (network sources) Settings Off (default) Does not output video. HDMI 1–5, AV 1–6, V-AUX Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks. ■ DMC Control Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. Input source SERVER Settings Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback. Enable (default) Allows DMCs to control playback. • You can still switch the scene by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3. • A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network. When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media Player 12) on the same network. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 83 4 ■ Load Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene assignments. ❑ Device Control Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected to the unit via HDMI. (SCENE link playback) Settings 5 6 Off Disables the SCENE link playback function. HDMI Control Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this if an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports HDMI Control. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Default SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO): Off Scene menu items Item Function Save Registers the current settings in the selected scene. Page 84 • To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set “HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.127). Load Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can also configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene assignments. 84 ❑ Detail Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon. 85 Reset Restores the default settings for the selected scene. 85 ■ Save Registers the unit’s current settings (input source, sound program/surround decoder, Compressed Music Enhancer on/off, and HDMI output jack [RX-V775 only]) in the selected scene. Displays the assignments of the selected scene. Input Input source to be used HDMI Output (RX-V775 only) HDMI OUT jack to be used Mode Sound program/surround decoder to be used Enhancer Compressed Music Enhancer on/off • If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.46). CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 84 ■ Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen. ■ Setup procedure 1 2 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w). Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be configured and press the cursor key (q). Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press ENTER. Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 4 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 5 • You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Reset Restores the default settings (p.46) for the selected scene. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 85 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. Sound Program menu items • Available items vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder. ■ Settings for sound programs Item Function Decode Type bPro Logic*, bPLIIx Movie (bPLII Movie), bPLIIx Music* (bPLII Music*), Selects a surround decoder to be used bPLIIx Game* (bPLII in combination with the selected sound Game*), Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music* program. (* Available only when “SURROUND DECODER” is selected) DSP Level Adjusts the sound field effect level. -6 dB to +3 dB (default: 0 dB) Higher to enhance the sound field effect, and lower to reduce it. Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and presence sound field generation. 1 ms to 99 ms Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it. Surround Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround sound field generation. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. • To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”. 5 6 Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Surround Back Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround back sound field generation. Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the presence sound field. Surround Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround sound field. Surround Back Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround back sound field. Liveness Adjusts the loss of the presence sound field. Surround Liveness Adjusts the loss of the surround sound field. Surround Back Liveness Adjusts the loss of the surround back sound field. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Settings 1 ms to 49 ms Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it. 0.1 to 2.0 Higher to enhance the broadening effect, and lower to reduce it. 0 to 10 Higher to enhance the reflectivity, and lower to reduce it. Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 86 ■ Settings for decoders Item Function Settings Reverb Time Adjust the decay time of the rear reverberant sound. 1.0 s to 5.0 s Higher to enrich the reverberant sound and lower to have clear sound. Reverb Delay Reverb Level Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and reverberant sound generation. 0 ms to 250 ms Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it. Adjusts the volume of the reverberant sound. 0% to 100% Higher to strengthen the reverberant sound, and lower to weaken it. The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “Surround Decoder” to “bPLIIx Music” or “Neo:6 Music”. Decode Type Function 2ch Stereo Selects whether to automatically bypass the DSP circuit when an analog audio source is played back. Direct Function Settings Panorama Adjusts the broadening effect of the front sound field. Off (default), On Select “On” to wrap front right/left channel sounds around the field and generate a spacious sound field in combination with the surround sound field. Center Width Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. 0 to 7 (default: 3) Higher to enhance the broadening effect, and lower to reduce it (closer to center). Dimension Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. -3 to +3 (default: 0) Higher to strengthen the front sound field and lower to strengthen the surround sound field. Center Image Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. 0.0 to 1.0 (default: 0.3) Higher to strengthen the center orientation level (less broadening effect) and lower to weaken (more broadening effect). bPLIIx Music The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo”. Sound program Item Item Settings Auto (default), Off Level Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to +5 (default: 0) Front / Rear Balance Adjusts the front and rear volume balance. -5 to +5 (default: 0) Higher to enhance the front side, and lower to enhance the rear side. Left / Right Balance Adjusts the right and left volume balance. -5 to +5 (default: 0) Higher to enhance the right side, and lower to enhance the left side. Height Balance Adjust the height volume balance using the presence speakers. 0 to 10 (default: 5) Higher to enhance the upside, and lower to enhance the downside. (The presence speakers do not produce sounds when “Height Balance” is set to “0”.) Monaural Mix Enables/disables monaural sound output. Off (default), On Neo:6 Music 7ch Stereo • Available items in “7ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 87 Configuring various functions (Setup menu) You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu. 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 5 6 Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 88 Setup menu items Menu Item Function Auto Setup Power Amp Assign Page Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO). 37 Selects a speaker system. 91 Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 91 Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 91 Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 91 Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. 92 Front Presence Selects whether or not presence speakers are connected. 92 Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase. 92 Extra Bass Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components. 92 Bass Cross Over Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component that can be output from speakers whose size is set to “Small”. 92 Configuration Speaker Manual Setup Lipsync Sound Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 93 Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 93 Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 93 Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 94 Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. 94 Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 94 Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 94 Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 94 Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 95 Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 95 Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level when the volume is adjusted. 95 Video Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio). 95 HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input). 96 HDMI Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 97 Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 97 CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 89 Menu Item Function Page IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 98 Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 98 MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 98 Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 99 Network Main Zone Set Multi Zone Zone2 Set Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the TV screen. 99 Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone. 100 Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. 100 Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the TV screen. 100 (RX-V775 only) Enables/disables switching to the party mode. 100 Party Mode Set Display Set Function Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 100 Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated. 100 Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. 101 Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. 101 Target Zone Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. 101 Power Mode Selects how to supply power through the DC OUT jack. 101 Trigger Output DC OUT Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 102 Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 102 ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 102 Select an on-screen menu language. 103 ECO Language CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 90 Speaker (Manual Setup) ❑ Front Selects the size of the front speakers. Configures the speaker settings manually. Settings Large Select this option for large speakers. The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency components. Small (default) Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”). • “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”. ■ Power Amp Assign ❑ Center Selects a speaker system. Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. In addition to the 5.1- or 7.1-channel speaker system, various speaker configurations are possible using the presence speakers, Zone2 speakers, or bi-amp connection. Settings Settings Large Select this option for large speakers. The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency components. Basic (default) Select this option when you use a normal speaker system (not using Zone2 speakers or a bi-amp connection). 7ch +1ZONE Select this option when you use Zone2 speakers (p.73) in addition to the speaker system in the main zone. Small (default) Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”). 5ch BI-AMP Select this option when you connect front speakers that support bi-amp connections (p.21). None Select this option when no center speaker is connected. The front speakers will produce center channel audio. ■ Configuration Configures the output characteristics of the speakers. ❑ Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes. Settings • When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm (6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”). Large Select this option for large speakers. The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel frequency components. Small (default) Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”). None Select this option when no surround speakers are connected. The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 91 ❑ Surround Back ❑ Subwoofer Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes. Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase. Settings Settings Normal (default) Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase not reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. Reverse Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. Large x1 Select this option when one large speaker is connected. The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back channel frequency components. Large x2 Select this option when two large speakers are connected. The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back channel frequency components. Small x1 Select this option when one small speaker is connected. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”). Small x2 (default) Select this option when two small speakers are connected. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”). • When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase. None Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected. The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio. ❑ Extra Bass Use None Select this option when no subwoofer is connected. The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components. Settings • This setting is not available when “Power Amp Assign” is set to “5ch BI-AMP”, or when “Surround” is set to “None”. ❑ Front Presence Off (default) Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the subwoofer or front speakers produce the front channel low-frequency components. On Both the front speakers and subwoofer produce the front channel low-frequency components. Selects whether or not presence speakers are connected. Settings Use (default) Select this option when presence speakers are connected. None Select this option when no presence speakers are connected. • This setting is not available when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”, or when “Front” is set to “Small”. ❑ Bass Cross Over Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a speaker whose size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified value will be produced from the subwoofer or front speakers Settings 40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz (default), 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz • If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and crossover frequency to maximum. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 92 ■ Distance ■ Manual equalizer adjustment Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance from “Meter” or “Feet”. Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer 1 2 3 Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen. Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER. • To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”. Setting range 0.30 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft), *0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments Default 3.00 m (10.0 ft) Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER. • To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.37) to the “Manual” fields for fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type. 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain. ■ Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer Setting range -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Default 0.0 dB Setting range Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB 5 ■ Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. Settings Manual Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually. For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”. YPAO:Flat Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics. YPAO:Front Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as the front speakers. YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound. Through Does not use the equalizer. To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER repeatedly to select an item. Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain. Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain. Setting range Center frequency: 31.3 HZ to 16.0 kHz Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080 6 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. • “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have already been saved (p.37). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 93 ■ Test Tone ❑ Auto/Manual Select Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker balance or equalizer while confirming its effect. Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. Setting range Settings Off (default) Does not output test tones. On Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance or equalizer. Sound Auto (default) Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the unit via HDMI. If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. Manual Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video and audio output manually. Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. Configures the audio output settings. • Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on the TV connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”. ❑ Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”. Setting range 0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments) Default 0 ms ■ Lipsync Adjusts the delay between video and audio output. ❑ Delay Enable • “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and fine adjustment. Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. ■ Dynamic Range Choices HDMI 1–5, AV 1–6, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–2 Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. Settings Settings Disable Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source. Enable (default) Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source. Maximum (default) Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range. Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use. Minimum/Auto Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low volumes. When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is automatically adjusted based on the input signal information. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 94 ■ Max Volume Video Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. Configures the video output settings. Setting range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB Default +16.5 dB ■ Initial Volume Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on. Settings Off (default) Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode. On Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments). (This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.) ■ Adaptive DSP Level ■ Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio). Settings Direct (default) Disables the video signal processing. Processing Enables the video signal processing. Select a resolution and an aspect ratio in “Resolution” and “Aspect”. Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level when the volume is adjusted. Settings Off Does not adjust the effect level automatically. On (default) Adjusts the effect level automatically. • When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to reduce video output delay. • When “Video Mode” is set to “Processing” and the resolution is being converted, short messages are not displayed on the TV screen. ❑ Resolution Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. Settings Through Does not convert the resolution. Auto (default) Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution. 480p/576p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p, 4K Output video signals with a selected resolution. (Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.) • If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MON.CHK” (p.106) in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be displayed on your TV normally.) CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 95 ❑ Aspect HDMI Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. Configures the HDMI settings. Settings Through (default) Does not convert the aspect ratio. 16:9 Normal Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side of the screen. • This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or 2160p (4K) signals. ■ HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.127). Settings Off (default) Disables HDMI Control. On Enables HDMI Control. Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby Sync”. • To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.127) after connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices. ❑ TV Audio Input Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner. Settings AV 1–6, AUDIO 1–2 Default AV 4 • When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 96 ❑ ARC Enables/disables ARC (p.23) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. ❑ HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2 (RX-V775 only) HDMI OUT (RX-V675 only) Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Settings Off Disables ARC. On (default) Enables ARC. • You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use the TV’s speakers. ❑ Standby Sync Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Settings Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. Auto (default) Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals. Settings Off (default) Disables the audio output from the TV. On Enables the audio output from the TV. ■ Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On”, you can use the input selection keys (HDMI 1–5, V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks). Settings Off (default) Does not output videos/audio to the TV. On Outputs videos/audio to the TV. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) • This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”. ■ Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. • This setting (except for “HDMI OUT2” [RX-V775 only]) is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”. ❑ Amp Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers connected to the unit. Settings Off Disables the audio output from the speakers. On (default) Enables the audio output from the speakers. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 97 Network Configures the network settings. 6 7 To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Network Standby Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network standby). Settings Off (default) Disables the network standby function. On Enables the network standby function. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) ■ IP Address ■ MAC Address Filter Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. ❑ DHCP ❑ Filter Select whether to use a DHCP server. Enables/disables the MAC address filter. Settings Settings Off Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”. Off (default) Disables the MAC address filter. On (default) Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network parameters (such as IP address). On Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit. ■ Manual network settings 1 2 Set “DHCP” to “Off”. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER. IP Address Specifies an IP address. Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask. Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway. DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server. DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a value. 4 5 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4. ❑ MAC Address 1–10 Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”. ■ Procedure 1 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1–5” or “MAC Address 6–10” and press ENTER. 2 3 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press ENTER. 4 5 6 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a value. To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 98 ■ Network Name Multi Zone Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. Configures the multi zone settings. ■ Procedure 1 2 Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. ■ Main Zone Set Configures the main zone setting. ❑ Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the TV screen. • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 3 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. ■ Procedure 1 2 Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 3 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 99 ■ Zone2 Set Function Configures the Zone2 settings. Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use. ❑ Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. Setting range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB Default +16.5 dB • This setting is available only when “Power Amp Assign” (p.91) is set to “7ch +1ZONE”. ❑ Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. Settings Off (default) Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode. On Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments). (This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.) ■ Display Set Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display. ❑ Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. Setting range -4 to 0 (higher to brighten) Default 0 • This setting is available only when “Power Amp Assign” (p.91) is set to “7ch +1ZONE”. • The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.102) is set to “On”. ❑ Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the TV screen. ❑ Short Message You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone Set” (p.99). Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment). ■ Party Mode Set Settings (RX-V775 only) On (default) Displays short messages on the TV screen. Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.76). Off Does not display short messages on the TV screen. Choice Target: Zone 2 Settings Disable Disables switching to the party mode. Enable (default) Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 100 ❑ Wallpaper Manual Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of the external device connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack. Settings Picture 1 (default), Picture 2, Picture 3 Displays the selected image on the TV screen when there is no video signal. Gray Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video signal. ■ Trigger Output Sets the TRIGGER OUT jack to function in sync with the power status of each zone or input switching. ❑ Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. Choices Low Stops the electronic signal transmission. High (default) Transmits the electronic signal. ❑ Target Zone Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. Settings Main When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the power status of the main zone. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone. Zone2 When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the power status of Zone2. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2. All (default) When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the power status of the main zone or Zone2. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone or Zone2. Settings Power (default) The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the zone specified with “Target Zone.” Source The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in the zone specified with “Target Zone.” An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in “Source.” Manual Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal transmission with “Manual.” ■ DC OUT Source Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”. Choices HDMI 1–5, AV 1–6, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–2, TUNER, PHONO*, (network sources), USB * RX-V775 only (except for U.S.A. and Canada models) Configures the DC OUT jack setting. ❑ Power Mode Selects how to supply power to the Yamaha AV accessory connected to the DC OUT jack. Settings Settings Low Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input source specified in this option. Continuous (default) Supplies power through the DC OUT jack continuously regardless of the power state (on/standby) of the unit. High (default) Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source specified in this option. Main Zone Power Sync. Supplies power through the DC OUT jack only when the main zone is turned on. (This setting may not work properly on some accessories.) CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 101 ■ Memory Guard ECO Prevents accidental changes to the settings. Configures the power supply settings. Settings Off (default) Does not protect the settings. On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected. • When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen. Icon ■ Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby mode. Settings Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically. 2 hours, 4 hours, 8 hours, 12 hours Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for the specified time. For example, when “2 hours” is selected, the unit will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours. Default U.K. and Europe models: 8 hours Other models: Off • Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the front display. ■ ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode. When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption. Settings Off (default) Disables the eco mode. On Enables the eco mode. • The new setting will take effect after the unit is restarted. • When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark. • If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 102 Language Select an on-screen menu language. Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) You can view information about the unit using the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER. Settings English (default) English 日本語 Japanese Français French Deutsch German Español Spanish Russian Italiano Italian Chinese • The information on the front display is provided in English only. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) En 103 ■ Network Types of information Displays the network information on the unit. ■ Audio Signal IP Address IP address Displays information about the current audio signal. Subnet Mask Subnet mask Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server Format Audio format of the input signal Channel The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE) For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total (3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE). Input Sampling The number of samples per second of the input digital signal Bitrate The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal Dialogue Output The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal The speaker terminals from which signals are output DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server MAC Address MAC address Network Name Network name (the unit’s name on the network) Status The connection status of the NETWORK jack ■ System Displays the system information on the unit. • Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the specifications and settings of the playback device. ■ Video Signal Displays information about the current video signal. HDMI Signal Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output HDMI Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI) Analog Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR OUT jacks (analog) ■ HDMI Monitor Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks. Interface TV interface Video Resolution Resolutions supported by the TV Remote ID The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.105) TV Format The unit’s video signal type (p.106) Speaker Impedance The speaker impedance setting of the unit (p.105) Tuner Freq. Step (Asia and General models only) The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.106) System ID System ID number Firmware Version The version of firmware installed on the unit • If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.113). ■ Multi Zone Displays information about Zone2. Input The input source selected for Zone2 Volume The volume setting for Zone2 • (RX-V775 only) Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) En 104 Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) SPIMP.8MIN Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display. 1 2 Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the speakers connected. Set the unit to standby mode. Settings While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z. MAIN ZONE z PROGRAM 3 4 5 6 Ω MIN Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. 8 Ω MIN (default) Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the unit. Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) STRAIGHT Press PROGRAM to select an item. REMOTEIDID1 Press STRAIGHT to select a setting. Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again. Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default: ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver. Settings ID1 (default), ID2 The new settings take effect. ■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control ADVANCED SETUP menu items Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be automatically canceled. Item Function SP IMP. Changes the speaker impedance setting. Page 105 REMOTE ID Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 105 TU (Asia and General models only) Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting. 106 TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type. 106 MON.CHK Removes the limitation on HDMI video output. 106 INIT Restores the default settings. 106 UPDATE Updates the firmware. 107 VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 107 1 2 3 Press CODE SET on the remote control. Press RECEIVER. Use the numeric keys to enter “5019” (ID1) or “5020” (ID2). Once the remote control ID is registered successfully, SOURCE blinks twice. If it blinks six times, registration failed. Repeat from Step 1. • The registered remote control codes (p.108) are not cleared even if you change the remote control ID. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 105 Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU) (Asia and General models only) TUFM50/AM9 Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or region. Settings FM100/AM10 Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz steps and AM by 10-kHz steps. FM50/AM9 (default) Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps and AM by 9-kHz steps. Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) TVFORMATNTSC Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MON.CHK) MON.CHKYES The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution” (p.95) when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a different resolution than the detected resolution. Settings YES (default) Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a resolution supported by the TV only.) SKIP Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.) • Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV after “MON.CHK” has been set to “SKIP”. Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV. Settings NTSC, PAL Default U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC Other models: PAL Restoring the default settings (INIT) INITCANCEL Restores the default settings for the unit. Choices VIDEO Restores the default settings for video configurations. ALL Restores the default settings for the unit. CANCEL Does not perform an initialization. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 106 Updating the firmware (UPDATE) UPDATEUSB New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from our website. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details, refer to the information supplied with updates. ■ Firmware update procedure Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware. 1 Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to start firmware update. Choices USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device. NETWORK Update the firmware via the network. • If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.113). Checking the firmware version (VERSION) VERSIONxx.xx Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. • You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.104) in the “Information” menu. • It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 107 SOURCE RECEIVER SOURCE Controlling external devices with the remote control HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 5 6 1 TUNER USB NET 4 AUDIO MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 2 • You cannot control an external device that does not have a remote control sensor. HDMI OUT • Ensure that the remote control ID of the external device is set to “ID1”. If any other ID is selected, the remote control operations may not work properly. SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO • If the unit’s remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, the registered codes may be cleared. If this happens, insert new batteries and register the codes again. VOLUME OPTION ENTER RETURN BAND MODE INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 3 4 ■ TV operations Registering the remote control code for a TV Once you have registered the remote control code for your TV, you can control it using the TV operation keys, regardless of the input source selected on the unit. 7 8 TV operation keys Numeric keys MEMORY 10 0 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE Once the remote control code is successfully registered, SOURCE blinks twice. You can use the unit’s remote control to operate a TV if you have registered its remote control code. MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 9 Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote control code. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE Press TV z. • Under the unit’s default settings, the amplifier code (Yamaha: 5098) is set for all the input selection keys. With this setting, you can control HDMI Control-compatible devices connected to the unit with the remote control. (This function may not work depending on the specification of the external device.) DISPLAY TUNING 3 4 If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 2. You can use the unit’s remote control to operate external devices (such as BD/DVD players) if you have registered the remote control code of the external device. V-AUX AV TV CH CODE SET TV operation keys TV z CODE SET • You can also register your TV’s remote control code to the unit’s input selection keys (p.109). This would allow you to use the cursor keys or numeric keys to operate the TV (this function may not be available on some TV models). INPUT Switches the video inputs of the TV. MUTE Mutes the audio output of the TV. TV VOL Adjust the volume of the TV. TV CH Switch the channels of the TV TV z Turns on/off the TV. • (RX-V775 [China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models] only) You can also assign a function to each key using the learning function (p.110). 1 Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM to find your TV’s remote control code. • If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If that does not work, try the other codes. 2 Press CODE SET. SOURCE blinks twice. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 108 RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 SOURCE z SOURCE RECEIVER V-AUX AV 1 2 3 4 Input selection keys AUDIO 5 6 TUNER MAIN 1 USB 2 NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT Registering the remote control codes for playback devices You can use the unit’s remote control to operate playback devices if you have registered their remote control codes. You can also use the input selection keys to change the playback devices that are controlled by the remote control, because their remote control codes are assigned to the input selection keys. • For details on how to register a remote control code to a SCENE key, refer to “Configuring scene assignments” (p.46). ■ Playback device operations Once you have registered the remote control code for your playback device, you can control it using the following keys after selecting the input source or scene. SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO • (RX-V675 and RX-V775 [U.S.A. and Canada models] only) If you assign the remote control code for an external device to the star (★) key, you can operate the device with the remote control without switching the input source after pressing the star key. VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION External device operation keys Menu operation keys ENTER RETURN DISPLAY • (RX-V775 [China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models] only) You can also assign a function to each key using the learning function (p.110). 1 DISPLAY Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM to find the remote control code for your playback device. BAND MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET • If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If that does not work, try the other codes. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Numeric keys 2 MEMORY 9 10 0 ENT TV TV operation keys INPUT TV VOL MUTE CODE SET CODE SET 3 SOURCE z Menu operation keys Select an item. ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. TOP MENU Displays the top menu. DISPLAY Switches information on the display. POP-UP/MENU Displays the pop-up menu. SOURCE blinks twice. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. a Starts playback of the selected song/video. External device operation keys h Press the input selection key. j For example, press HDMI 1 to set the remote control code for the playback device connected to the HDMI 1 jack. 4 Turns on/off the playback device. Cursor keys Press CODE SET. Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 2. TV CH • By pressing SOURCE or RECEIVER, you can switch the devices (the unit or external device) that are operated by the menu operation keys, DISPLAY and numeric keys. You can operate the unit after pressing RECEIVER (lights up in orange), and an external device after pressing SOURCE (lights up in green). For example, if you register the remote control code of your external device on TUNER, you can operate the unit’s built-in FM/AM radio after pressing RECEIVER and the external device after pressing SOURCE. Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote control code. Searches forward/backward (by holding down). f g Skips forward/backward. Numeric keys Enter numerical values. TV operation keys Control the TV (p.108). Once the remote control code is registered successfully, SOURCE blinks twice. If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2. CONFIGURATIONS • These keys work only if the corresponding function is available on your playback device and if the device can be operated with an infrared remote control. ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 109 RECEIVER SOURCE SOURCE z SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 AV 2 3 4 6 TUNER MAIN 1 USB 2 NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO 1 VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION External device operation keys RETURN 2 DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 TV VOL MUTE TV CH CODE SET If it blinks six times, learning has failed. Repeat Step 5. Press one of the following keys depending on the type of your device. For TV: press TV z. ENT TV INPUT TV operation keys TV z CODE SET 3 4 b On the external device, press the key from which the operation is learned. SOURCE blinks twice. Numeric keys MEMORY For TV: TV operation keys Once the operation is learned successfully, SOURCE blinks twice. For playback device: press the input selection key (corresponding to the input jacks where the device is connected). SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE For playback device: SOURCE z, menu operations keys, external device operation keys Press CODE SET. Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 1. Menu operation keys ENTER Perform the following steps within 10 seconds. a On this unit, press one of the following keys to which you want to assign a function. The remote control of the unit can receive remote control signals from other remote controls and learn the remote control operation. If you cannot find a remote control code for your playback device or if any key on the remote control does not work after you register the remote control code, use the learning function to assign a function to each key. AUDIO 5 5 (RX-V775 [China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models] only) V-AUX 1 Programming from other remote controls (learning) Use the numeric keys to enter “9990”. 6 Repeat step 5 until all desired operations are learned. 7 Press CODE SET. SOURCE blinks once. Note • If you press RECEIVER in step 2, you can assign functions of an external receiver to the menu operation keys, external device operation keys or numeric keys. However, it makes these keys to control the unit impossible. If you need to restore the remote control code for the unit, perform the following steps. a Press CODE SET. b Press RECEIVER. Aim the infrared transmitters of the remote controls at each other. c Use the numeric keys to enter “9992”. Remote control of external device SOURCE 3 4 V-AUX 2 4 HDMI OUT AUDIO PARTY RECEIVER HDMI 3 AV 1 2 2 NET 1 6 5 1 USB ZONE 2 5 RADIO VOLUME NET SCENE TV MUTE POP-UP/MENU TUNER MAIN BD DVD PROGRAM TOP MENU 5 to 10 cm apart CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 110 SOURCE RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 V-AUX AV 1 2 3 4 6 TUNER MAIN 1 USB TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 1 1 HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD (RX-V775 [China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models] only) Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 1. VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 2 OPTION Press one of the following keys to select the device for which key assignments will be cleared. ENTER For playback device: press the input selection key. RETURN For TV: press TV z. DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING 3 4 PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 4 7 8 10 0 MUTE Press one of the following keys to select the device for which key assignments will be cleared. For playback device: press the input selection key. For TV: press TV z. 3 Use the numeric keys to enter “9992”. Once the key assignment is cleared successfully, SOURCE blinks twice. If it blinks six times, clearing failed. Repeat from Step 1. Use the numeric keys to enter “9991”. Press the key that you want to reset. ENT If it blinks six times, clearing failed. Repeat from Step 2. TV TV z INPUT TV VO VOLL 2 Once the key assignment is cleared successfully, SOURCE blinks twice. Numeric keys MEMORY 9 Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 1. Press CODE SET. SOURCE blinks twice. RADIO Press CODE SET. SOURCE blinks twice. ■ Clearing the assignment for each key 2 NET PARTY ZONE 2 ■ Clearing the assignments for each input source Input selection keys AUDIO 5 Clearing functions learned from other remote controls TTVV CH CODE SET CODE SET 5 Repeat step 4 until all desired key assignments are cleared. 6 Press CODE SET. SOURCE blinks once. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 111 SOURCE RECEIVER SOURCE Resetting remote control codes RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 You can reset a remote control code registered to each input selection key. 4 5 V-AUX AV 1 2 3 4 Input selection keys AUDIO 5 6 TUNER MAIN 1 USB 2 1 SOURCE blinks twice. NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 1. SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO 2 3 VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Press CODE SET. Press the input selection key. Use the numeric keys to enter “5098”. OPTION Once the remote control code is reset successfully, SOURCE blinks twice. ENTER RETURN If it blinks six times, resetting has failed. Repeat from Step 1. DISPLAY BAND To reset the remote control to factory default settings MODE TUNING PRESET a Press CODE SET. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC b Press RECEIVER. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 9 0 c Use the numeric keys to enter “9981”. 3 7 4 8 Numeric keys MEMORY 10 ENT TV INPUT TV VO VOLL MUTE TTVV CH CODE SET CODE SET CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 112 Updating the unit’s firmware via the network RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and update it. V-AUX AV 1 2 3 4 AUDIO 5 6 1 TUNER USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 2 BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE Note RADIO • Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more (depending on your Internet connection speed). TOP MENU • If the unit is connected to the wireless network via a wireless network adapter, network update may not be possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case, update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.107). VOLUME If “Update Success Please Power Off!” appears on the front display, press MAIN ZONE z on the front panel. The firmware update is complete. HDMI OUT SCENE 3 • If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in Step 2. “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.104). You can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET • You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.107). Information icon A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed after ON SCREEN is pressed. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 8 MEMORY 10 ENT TV INPUT TV VO VOLL MUTE TTVV CH CODE SET Message System Icon 1 2 Read the on-screen description. To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to select “START” and press ENTER. The on-screen display turns off. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Updating the unit’s firmware via the network En 113 APPENDIX Frequently asked questions The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound balance... If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to optimize the speaker settings again (p.37). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.91). Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the volume control... If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum volume level for the unit in advance (p.95). You can also set the maximum volume for Zone2 (p.100). I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning on the unit... By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.95). You can also set the initial volume for Zone2 (p.100). We are bothered by volume differences when switching between input sources… enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device. I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during operations... By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.100) in the “Setup” menu to turn off the short messages. I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings... You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.102). The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another Yamaha product as well as the unit... When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens, register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each remote control (p.105). You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in the “Option” menu (p.80). I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device even when the unit is in standby mode… I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at all... If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.97) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when this function is enabled. To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.127). After connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit, APPENDIX ➤ Frequently asked questions En 114 Troubleshooting Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. First, check the following: a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets securely. b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on. c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device. Power, system and remote control Problem Cause Remedy The power does not turn on. The protection circuitry has been activated three times consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power. As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair. The power does not turn off. The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply voltage. Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.) The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers (p.20). The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again. The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used for the specified time. To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup” menu to “Off” (p.102). The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.105). The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers (p.20). The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply voltage. Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.) The unit enters standby mode automatically. The unit is not reacting. APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 115 Problem The unit cannot be controlled using the remote control. Cause The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5). The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries. The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong lighting. Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit. The remote control is set to control external devices. Press RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key lights up in orange). The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.105). The remote control is set to control the unit. Press SOURCE to set the remote control to control external devices (the key lights up in green). The corresponding remote control code is not set properly. Set the remote control code again (p.108). Even if the remote control code is registered properly, some products may not respond to the remote control. A remote control code for another playback device is assigned to V-AUX. Reset the remote control code registered to V-AUX (p.112). The mobile device or its application is not externally controllable. Directly operate the mobile device itself. The batteries of the remote control of the unit and/or the external device are weak. Replace with new batteries. External devices cannot be controlled using the remote control. The MHL-compatible mobile device cannot be controlled using the remote control. Remedy The remote control does not learn new functions. The distance between the two remote controls is not appropriate. (RX-V775 [China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models] The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not only) compatible with the remote control. Memory capacity is full. Place the remote controls at a proper distance (p.110). Learning is impossible in this case. Clear unnecessary assignments to free some memory space for new functions (p.111). APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 116 Audio Problem No sound. Cause Remedy Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input. Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.104). The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.95). A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit. The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.104). The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the speaker. To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.94). Audio output of the speaker is disabled. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.37) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the speaker settings (p.91). The volume of the speaker is set too low. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.37) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker volume (p.93). The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable. The speaker is malfunctioning. To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be malfunctioning. The extended surround is disabled. Use “Extended Surround” in the “Option” menu to select a decoder to be used (p.80). The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency signals. To check it, set “Extra Bass” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, in order to output the front channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer (p.92). Subwoofer output is disabled. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.37) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use” (p.92). The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer. The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level. The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from the SPEAKERS terminals. In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.97). The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. The volume cannot be increased. No sound is coming from a specific speaker. No sound is coming from the surround back speaker. No sound is coming from the subwoofer. No sound from the playback device (connected to the unit with HDMI). APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 117 Problem No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is used). Only the front speakers work on multichannel audio. Cause Remedy The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers. Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the speakers connected to the unit. A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with an HDMI cable. Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.25). (If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable) The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection. Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack (p.96). (If you are trying to use ARC) ARC is disabled on the unit or TV. Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.97). Also, enable ARC on the TV. The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as PCM) only. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.104). If necessary, change the digital audio output setting on the playback device. The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device. The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. Noise/hum is heard. The volume of the unit is too high. Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, set it to “Off” (p.102). A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks. Cause Remedy The sound is distorted. Video Problem No video. No video from the playback device (connected to the unit with HDMI). Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Set “MON.CHK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.106). The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit. To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.104). For information about video signals supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.128). The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI. You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.23 to 26). Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV. APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 118 FM/AM radio Problem Cause There is multi-path interference. Remedy Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio reception (p.80). FM radio reception is weak or noisy. Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. AM radio reception is weak or noisy. The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or other electrical equipment. It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor AM antenna. Select the station manually (p.53). Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. Adjust the AM antenna orientation. Radio stations cannot be selected automatically. The AM radio signal is weak. Select the station manually (p.53). Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with the supplied AM antenna. AM radio stations cannot be registered as presets. Auto Preset has been used. Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations manually (p.54). APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 119 USB and network Problem Cause Remedy The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again. The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format. Folders and files in the USB device cannot be viewed. The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function. The network feature does not function. The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained properly. Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup” menu to “On” on the unit (p.98). If you want to configure the network parameters manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other network devices in your network (p.98). The media sharing setting is not correct. Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.65). Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access of the unit to your PC. Check the settings of security software installed on your PC. The unit and PC are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and the PC to the same network. The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.98). The files are not supported by the unit or the media server. Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.65). The selected Internet radio station is currently not available. There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have been stopped. Try the station later or select another station. The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting silence. Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try the station later or select another station. Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your network devices (such as the router). Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The port number varies depending on the radio station. The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network. The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the unit (p.98). It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.107). The unit does not detect the USB device. The unit does not detect the PC. The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played back. The Internet radio cannot be played. The application for smartphone/tablet “AV Controller” does not detect the unit. Firmware update via the network is failed. APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 120 Error indications on the front display Message Cause Remedy Access denied Access to the PC is denied. Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.65). Access error The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again. The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.58). Make sure your router and modem are turned on. There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit. Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.33). Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly. Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. MHL Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the MHL-compatible mobile device. Turn off the unit and check the connection between the unit and mobile device. No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit. The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again. Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network. Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn it on again. RemID Mismatch The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.105). The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some reason. Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be defective. The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some reason. Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.65). If the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with heavy traffic. No device Unable to play USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again. APPENDIX ➤ Error indications on the front display En 121 Ideal speaker layout Use this diagram as a guide. You do not need to adjust the speaker layout to the following diagram exactly. Q W 0.5 to 1 m (1.6 to 3.3 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1.6 to 3.3 ft) 1.8 m (5.9 ft) 1 9 1.8 m (5.9 ft) 2 3 9 Turn it slightly inward to reduce wall reflections. Turn it slightly inward to reduce wall reflections. 4 5 10° to 30° 10° to 30° 1 Front speaker (L) 2 Front speaker (R) 3 Center speaker 6 7 4 Surround speaker (L) 5 Surround speaker (R) 6 Surround back speaker (L) 7 Surround back speaker (R) 0.3 m (1 ft) or more Q Presence speaker (L) W Presence speaker (R) 9 Subwoofer APPENDIX ➤ Ideal speaker layout En 122 Glossary Audio information ■ Audio decoding format Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs. Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources. Dolby Pro Logic IIx DTS Express DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS Neo:6 DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound. DSD (Direct Stream Digital) Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources (for 2-channel sources only). DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz. The highest frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology offers better audio quality than that used for CDs. Dolby TrueHD FLAC Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality. DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc. DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs. DTS-ES DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a discrete surround back channel is recorded. MP3 One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. MPEG-4 AAC An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality than MP3. PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs). APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 123 Sampling frequency/Quantization bit Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”. • Sampling frequency Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate. When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider. • Quantization bit The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more accurate. WAV Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other compression methods. WMA (Windows Media Audio) One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. ■ Others Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp) A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference. LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio. Lip sync Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag between audio and video output. HDMI and video information Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined and transmitted with a single cable. Deep Color Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. MHL MHL (Mobile High-definition Link) is the interface standard for high-speed digital video signal transmission that is developed for mobile devices. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals from mobile devices (such as smartphones) using a single cable with any loss. As with HDMI, MHL complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). x.v.Color “x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid, natural images. APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 124 Yamaha technologies CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor) Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions (such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP, Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own home. CINEMA DSP 3D The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room. Compressed Music Enhancer The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound system. SILENT CINEMA Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed on headphones. Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a listening room. Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without front presence speakers. Even if the front presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D sound field in your room. APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 125 Video signal flow Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output to a TV as shown below. ■ Video conversion table • You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.95) in the “Setup” menu. • The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably. HDMI out Video device The unit TV Resolution 480i/ 576i 480p/ 576p 720p 1080i 1080p 4K 480i/576i m m m m m m m m m m m 720p m m m m 1080i m m m m 1080p/50, 60 Hz m m m m m m 480p/576p HDMI in HDMI out HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI in 1080p/24 Hz COMPONENT VIDEO in COMPONENT VIDEO out COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO 480i/576i PR PR PR PB PB PB PB Y Y Y Y VIDEO VIDEO out VIDEO VIDEO 480p/ 576p 720p 1080i 480i/ 576i m m m m m m m COMPONENT VIDEO PR VIDEO in 480i/ 576i m 4K COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO out COMPONENT VIDEO out COMPONENT VIDEO in m 480p/576p m 720p m 1080i VIDEO VIDEO in 480i/576i m m m m m m m m: Available APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 126 (Example) Information on HDMI HDMI Control HDMI Control HDMI Control HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with an HDMI cable. For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.23) and “Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.28). Operations available from the TV’s remote control Press SCENE (BD/DVD) To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after connecting the TV and playback devices. • This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. • Standby synchronization • Volume control including mute • Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner • Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device 1 2 • Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker) HDMI Control Playback device also turns off The unit turns off (standby) Turn off the TV Operations available from the unit’s remote control • Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene selection (p.46) • Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed) • Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) without registering remote control codes (p.109) Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices. Enable HDMI Control on the unit, TV, and playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players). To enable HDMI Control on the unit, set “HDMI Control” (p.96) in the “Setup” menu to “On” and configure the related items (“TV Audio Input”, “ARC”, and “Standby Sync”). (Example) HDMI Control Turns on and displays video from the playback device Playback starts 3 Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and playback devices. 4 5 6 Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. Check the followings. On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select the input source manually. On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed. APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 127 7 Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. HDMI signal compatibility Audio signals Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example) 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio • If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on the TV. Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD • We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more effectively. DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express • If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 2 and plugging in the TV again in Step 3. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use. Video signals The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions: • VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • 480p/60 Hz • 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • 576p/50 Hz • When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending on the type of the DVD player. • The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction manual for each device. • To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device). For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device. APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 128 Trademarks Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, Surround EX and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a trademark of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. “Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance. AirPlay, the AirPlay logo, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. MHL and the MHL logo are a trademark, registered trademark or service mark of MHL, LLC in the United States and/or other countries. x.v.Color™ “x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of Digital Living Network Alliance. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. Windows™ Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson. Android™ Android is a trademark of Google Inc. This receiver supports network connections. APPENDIX ➤ Trademarks En 129 Specifications Input jacks Output jacks Other jacks • Analog Audio • Analog Audio • YPAO MIC x 1 [RX-V775] [RX-V775] [U.S.A. and Canada models] - Speaker Out x 9 (7 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, • REMOTE IN x 1 Audio x 4 (AV 5–6, AUDIO 1–2) SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R*1, EXTRA SP L/R*2) • REMOTE OUT x 1 [Other models] *1 Note: Assignment is possible [SURROUND BACK, • TRIGGER OUT x 1 Audio x 5 (AV 5–6, AUDIO 1–2, PHONO) [RX-V675] Audio x 4 (AV 5–6, AUDIO 1–2) • Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz) BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)] *2 Note: Assignment is possible [ZONE2, PRESENCE] - Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R) Optical x 2 (AV 1, AV 4) - Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1–2, mono) Coaxial x 2 (AV 2–3) - AV OUT x 1 • Video Composite x 5 (AV 3–6, VIDEO [Front Panel]) Component x 2 (AV 1–2) • HDMI Input HDMI x 6 (HDMI 1–5, V-AUX*) * V-AUX: MHL input compatible • Other • DC OUT x 1 HDMI • HDMI features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC (Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K • Video Format (Repeater Mode) - ZONE2 OUT x 1 - VGA - Headphone x 1 - 480i/60 Hz [RX-V675] - 576i/50 Hz - Speaker Out x 9 (7 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, - 480p/60 Hz SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R*1, EXTRA SP L/R*2) - 576p/50 Hz *1 Note: Assignment is possible [SURROUND BACK, - 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)] *2 Note: Assignment is possible [ZONE2, PRESENCE] USB x 1 (USB2.0) - Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1–2, mono) NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T) - AV OUT x 1 - ZONE2 OUT x 1 - Headphone x 1 • Video - 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz - 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz - 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • Audio Format - Dolby TrueHD - Dolby Digital Plus - Dolby Digital MONITOR OUT - DTS-HD Master Audio - Component x 1 - DTS-HD High Resolution Audio - Composite x 1 - DTS Express AV OUT - DTS - Composite x 1 - DSD 2-ch to 6-ch • HDMI Output [RX-V775] HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1–2) - PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit) • Content Protection: HDCP compatible • Link Function: CEC supported [RX-V675] HDMI OUT x 1 APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 130 MHL • Video Format (Repeater Mode) - VGA - 480i/60 Hz - 576i/50 Hz - 480p/60 Hz - 576p/50 Hz - 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz - 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz - 1080p/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • Audio Format - PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit) • Current Supply Capacity: 1.0 A TUNER • Analog Tuner • Post Decoding Format [RX-V775] - Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω) Dolby Pro Logic II Game - Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game - DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema Audio Section • Rated Output Power (2-channel driven) [RX-V775] (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 8 Ω) Front L/R ................................................................. 95 W+95 W (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω) Surround Back L/R..................................................... 130 W/ch (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 Ω) Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models].......................... 160 W/ch [RX-V675] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω) Front L/R..................................................................... 125 W/ch Center ....................................................................... 125 W/ch Surround L/R .............................................................. 125 W/ch (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 Ω) Surround L/R ...................................................... 110 W+110 W Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models].......................... 150 W/ch [RX-V675] [Other models] (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 8 Ω) FM/AM x 1 (TUNER) Front L/R ................................................................. 90 W+90 W (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω) Front L/R ............................................................. 105 W+105 W Center..............................................................................105 W • Current Supply Capacity: 2.1 A Surround L/R ...................................................... 105 W+105 W Network Surround Back L/R ............................................. 105 W+105 W • Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5 Surround L/R .............................................................. 130 W/ch Surround Back L/R..................................................... 125 W/ch FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER) • PC Client Function Center ....................................................................... 130 W/ch Center..............................................................................110 W Surround Back L/R ............................................. 110 W+110 W • Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory Front L/R..................................................................... 130 W/ch Front L/R ............................................................. 110 W+110 W [U.K. and Europe models] USB • Rated Output Power (1-channel driven) - Dolby Pro Logic • Maximum Effective Output Power (JEITA, 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω) [China, Korea, Asia and General models] [RX-V775] Front L/R..................................................................... 160 W/ch Center ........................................................................ 160 W/ch Surround L/R .............................................................. 160 W/ch Surround Back L/R..................................................... 160 W/ch [RX-V675] Front L/R..................................................................... 150 W/ch Center ........................................................................ 150 W/ch Surround L/R .............................................................. 150 W/ch Surround Back L/R..................................................... 150 W/ch • AirPlay supported • Dynamic Power (IHF) • Internet Radio Compatible Decoding Formats • Decoding Format - Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus - Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX - DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, [RX-V775] Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω) .................................. 140/180/210/250 W [RX-V675] Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω) .................................. 130/170/200/240 W • Damping Factor Front L/R, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω .............................100 or more DTS Express - DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 - DTS Digital Surround APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 131 • Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance • Total Harmonic Distortion • Filter Characteristics [RX-V775] [RX-V775] (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω) PHONO to AV OUT (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back).......12 dB/oct. [Except for U.S.A. and Canada models] .............3.5 mV/47 kΩ [Except for U.S.A. and Canada models]............. 0.02% or less L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .....................................................24 dB/oct. AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω)..............................200 mV/47 kΩ AV 5 etc. to Front (Pure Direct) [RX-V675] (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω)............................... 0.06% or less AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω)..............................200 mV/47 kΩ [RX-V675] • Maximum Input Signal [RX-V775] PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) AV 5 etc. to Front (Pure Direct) (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω)............................... 0.06% or less • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) Video Section • Video Signal Type [U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models] ................NTSC [Other models] ....................................................................PAL • Video Signal Type (Video Conversion)..................... NTSC/PAL • Video Signal Level [Except for U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................ 60 mV [RX-V775] AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) ........................... 2.3 V PHONO (Input Shorted 5 mV, AV OUT) Composite..............................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω [RX-V675] [Except for U.S.A. and Canada models]............ 81 dB or more Component AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) ........................... 2.3 V AV 5 etc. (Input Shorted 250 mV, Speaker Out) • Output Level / Output Impedance ......................................................................... 100 dB or more [RX-V775] [RX-V675] AV OUT ..............................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ AV 5 etc. (Input Shorted 250 mV, Speaker Out) PRE OUT...................................................................1 V/1.2 kΩ ......................................................................... 100 dB or more SUBWOOFER ...........................................................1 V/1.2 kΩ ZONE2 OUT.......................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ [RX-V675] • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R (Speaker Out) ..................................... 150 µV or less • Channel Separation AV OUT ..............................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ [RX-V775] SUBWOOFER ...........................................................1 V/1.2 kΩ PHONO (Input Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) ZONE2 OUT.......................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ [Except for U.S.A. and Canada models] • Headphone Jack Rated Output / Impedance AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) .............................100 mV/560 Ω • Frequency Response AV 5 etc. to Front (10 Hz to 100 kHz) ......................... +0/-3 dB • RIAA Equalization Deviation [RX-V775] PHONO [Except for U.S.A. and Canada models] ....................0±0.5 dB ................................................................ 60 dB/55 dB or more AV 5 etc. (Input 5.1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) ................................................................ 60 dB/45 dB or more [RX-V675] AV 5 etc. (Input 5.1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) ................................................................ 60 dB/45 dB or more • Volume Control Range............................................. MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB Step ................................................................................ 0.5 dB • Tone Control Characteristics Y ..........................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω Pb/Pr ................................................................0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω • Video Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off) ....................................................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more • Video Signal to Noise Ratio................................ 50 dB or more • Monitor Out Frequency Response (Video Conversion Off) Component ............................................5 Hz to 60 MHz, -3 dB FM Section • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models].......................87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Asia and General models] ...................................... 87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models] ................................ 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz • 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.) Mono ................................................................. 3 µV (20.8 dBf) • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono ................................................................................71 dB Stereo...............................................................................69 dB • Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz) Mono ................................................................................. 0.3% Bass Boost/Cut............................. ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 50 Hz Stereo................................................................................ 0.5% Bass Turnover ............................................................... 350 Hz • Antenna Input................................................ 75 Ω unbalanced Treble Boost/Cut..........................±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 20 kHz Treble Turnover..............................................................3.5 kHz APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 132 AM section • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ......................... 530 to 1710 kHz [Asia and General models]...... 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models]......................................... 531 kHz to 1611 kHz General • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ......................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz [General model]............ AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz [China model] ................................................. AC 220 V, 50 Hz [Korea model]................................................. AC 220 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] ............................................ AC 240 V, 50 Hz [U.K. and Europe models].............................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz [Asia model] ................................... AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. 400 W/500 VA [China, Asia and General models] ................................. 270 W [Other models]................................................................ 300 W • Standby Power Consumption HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................0.10 W or less [Other models]....................................................0.15 W or less HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals) .................................................................................3 W or less Network Standby On ...............................................3 W or less • Maximum Power Consumption [Asia and General models]............................................. 590 W • Dimensions (W x H x D) [RX-V775] ..... 435 x 171 x 368 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 14-1/2”) [RX-V675] ..... 435 x 171 x 364 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 14-3/8”) * Including legs and protrusions • Weight [RX-V775] ..................................................... 10.5 kg (23.2 lbs) [RX-V675] ..................................................... 10.0 kg (22.1 lbs) * Specifications are subject to change without notice. APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 133 Index Symbols ★ keys 13 Exclamation mark (!) Lock icon (o) 102 104, 113 Numerics 16:9 Normal (Aspect, Setup menu) 96 2.1-channel system 17 2ch Stereo (sound program) 50 3.1-channel system 17 4.1-channel system 17 4K signal (video signal resolution) 128 5.1-channel system 17 5ch BI-AMP (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 91 6.1-channel system 16, 20 7.1+2-channel system 16, 19 7.1-channel system 16, 19, 20 7ch +1ZONE (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 91 7ch Stereo (sound program) 50 A Access denied (error indication) 121 Access error (error indication) 121 Action Game (sound program) 49 Adaptive DRC (Option menu) 79 Adaptive DSP Level (Sound, Setup menu) Adjustment (Lipsync, Setup menu) 94 ADVANCED SETUP menu 105 Adventure (sound program) 49 AirPlay 70 AM antenna connection 32 AM radio listening 53 Amp (Audio Output, Setup menu) 97 ARC (Audio Return Channel) 23 ARC (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 97 Aspect (Video Mode, Setup menu) 96 Audio Decoder (front display information) Audio device connection 31 95 77 Audio file format (PC/NAS) 65 Audio file format (USB storage device) 62 Audio In (Input menu) 82 AUDIO jack 22 Audio Output (HDMI, Setup menu) 97 Audio Return Channel (ARC) 23 Audio Signal (Information menu) 104 Auto Power Standby (ECO, Setup menu) 102 Auto Preset (FM radio) 57 Auto Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) 37 Auto/Manual Select (Lipsync, Setup menu) 94 Automatic speaker setting optimization 37 Automatic station preset (FM radio) 57 AutoPowerStdby (ECO, Setup menu) 102 AV OUT jack 11, 12 B Banana plug 20 Basic playback operation 45 Bass (Tone Control, Option menu) 79 Bass Cross Over (Speaker, Setup menu) 92 Bi-amp speaker connection 21 Bitrate (Audio Signal, Information menu) 104 Bitstream 128 C CAT-5 cable 33 Cellar Club (sound program) 50 Center (Speaker, Setup menu) 91 Center Image (Sound Program menu) 87 Center Width (Sound Program menu) 87 Chamber (sound program) 50 Channel (Audio Signal, Information menu) 104 Check SP Wires (error indication) 121 Check Sur. (YPAO error message) 43 CINEMA DSP 3D 48 CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (Option menu) 79 CLASSICAL (sound program subcategory) 50 Clear Preset (FM/AM radio) 57 Clearing (remote control) 111 Clock Time (Radio Data System) 55 COAXIAL jack 22 Component video cable 22 Component video connection (video device) 28 COMPONENT VIDEO jack 22 Composite video connection (video device) 29 Compressed Music Enhancer 52 Configuration (Speaker, Setup menu) 91 Crossover frequency setting 92 Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer) 37 D DC OUT (Function, Setup menu) 101 DC OUT jack 11, 12 Decode Type (Sound Program menu) 86 Decoder Mode (Input menu) 82 Decoder Off (front display information) 77 Default Gateway (IP Address, Setup menu) 98 Default Gateway (Network, Information menu) 104 Default setting restoration 106 Delay Enable (Lipsync, Setup menu) 94 Detail (Load, Scene menu) 84 Device Control (Load, Scene menu) 84 DHCP (IP Address, Setup menu) 98 Dialog Adjust (Option menu) 79 Dialog Lift (Dialog Adjust, Option menu) 79 Dialog Lvl (Dialog Adjust, Option menu) 79 Dialogue (Audio Signal, Information menu) 104 Dialogue Adjust (Option menu) 79 Dialogue Level (Dialogue Adjust, Option menu) 79 Dialogue Lift (Dialogue Adjust, Option menu) 79 Dialogue normalization level 104 Digital coaxial cable 22 Digital Media Controller (DMC) 83 Digital optical cable 22 Dimension (Sound Program menu) 87 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 134 Dimmer (Front Display) (Display Set, Setup menu) 100 Direct (Sound Program menu) 87 Direct Stream Digital (DSD) 123 DISPLAY key 13 Display Set (Function, Setup menu) 100 Distance (Speaker, Setup menu) 93 Distance (YPAO measurement result) 42 DLNA 65 DMC (Digital Media Controller) 83 DMC Control (Input menu) 83 DNS Server (IP Address, Setup menu) 98 DNS Server (Network, Information menu) 104 Dolby Digital EX (Extended Surround) 80 Dolby Pro Logic (surround decoder) 51 Dolby Pro Logic II Game (surround decoder) 51 Dolby Pro Logic II Movie (surround decoder) 51 Dolby Pro Logic II Music (surround decoder) 51 Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game (surround decoder) 51 Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (Extended Surround) 80 Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (surround decoder) 51 Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music (Extended Surround) 80 Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music (surround decoder) 51 Drama (sound program) 49 DSD (Direct Stream Digital) 123 DSP Level (Sound Program menu) 86 DSP Program (front display information) 77 DTS Neo:6 Cinema (surround decoder) 51 DTS Neo:6 Music (surround decoder) 51 DTS-ES (Extended Surround) 80 Dynamic Range (Sound, Setup menu) 94 Filter (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 98 Firmware update 107 Firmware update (network) 107, 113 Firmware update (USB) 107 Firmware Version (System, Information menu) 104 Firmware version check 107 FM antenna connection 32 FM Mode (Option menu) 80 FM radio listening 53 FM/AM radio tuning 53 Format (Audio Signal, Information menu) 104 Frequency (FM/AM radio) 53 Frequency step setting 53, 106 Front (Speaker, Setup menu) 91 Front / Rear Balance (Sound Program menu) 87 Front display (part names and functions) 10 Front display brightness 100 Front display information 77 Front panel (part names and functions) 8, 9 Front panel jack connection 31 Front Presence (Speaker, Setup menu) 92 Function (Setup menu) 100 G H 49 13 F GND terminal 31 Ground lead 31 E ECO (Setup menu) 102 ECO Mode (ECO, Setup menu) 102 Enhancer (Option menu) 80 ENHANCER (sound mode) 52 ENTERTAINMENT (sound program subcategory) Error indication (front display) 121 EX/ES (Extended Surround, Option menu) 80 EXTD Surround (Option menu) 80 Extended Surround (Option menu) 80 External device control (remote control) 108 External device operation key (remote control) External power amplifier 34 Extra Bass (Speaker, Setup menu) 92 Hall in Munich (sound program) 50 Hall in Vienna (sound program) 50 HDMI (Setup menu) 96 HDMI cable 22 HDMI connection (video device) 28 HDMI Control (HDMI, Setup menu) 96 HDMI jack 22 HDMI Monitor (Information menu) 104 HDMI OUT (Audio Output, Setup menu) 97 HDMI OUT1 (Audio Output, Setup menu) 97 HDMI OUT2 (Audio Output, Setup menu) 97 HDMI output selection 45 HDMI signal compatibility 128 Headphones 48 Height Balance (Sound Program menu) 87 High definition audio 128 High speed HDMI cable 22 I In.Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 80 Indicator (part names and functions) 10 INFO key 8, 9, 13 Information display (front display) 10 Information menu 103 Information switching (front display) 77 INIT (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 106 Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 86 Initial Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 95 Initial Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 100 Input (Audio Signal, Information menu) 104 Input (front display information) 77 Input menu 81 Input selection key (remote control) 13 Input Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 80 Internal Error (error indication) 121 Internal Error (YPAO error message) 43 Internet radio listening 68 IP Address (Network, Information menu) 104 IP Address (Network, Setup menu) 98 iPod charge 58 iPod connection 58 iPod content playback 59 iPod content playback (AirPlay) 70 iTunes content playback (AirPlay) 70 L Language (Setup menu) 103 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 135 MOVIE (sound program category) 49 MOVIE THEATER (sound program subcategory) Multi measurement (YPAO) 40 Multi Zone (Information menu) 104 Multi Zone (Setup menu) 99 Multiple room playback 72 Multi-zone 72 MUSIC (sound program category) 50 Music Video (sound program) 49 MUTE key 13 Muting 45 Learning (remote control) 110 Left / Right Balance (Sound Program menu) 87 Level (Sound Program menu) 87 Level (Speaker, Setup menu) 93 Level (YPAO measurement result) 42 Level Error (YPAO warning message) 44 LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 124 Lipsync 124 Lipsync (Sound, Setup menu) 94 LIVE/CLUB (sound program subcategory) 50 Liveness (Sound Program menu) 86 Load (Scene menu) 84 Low Frequency Effects (LFE) 124 N M MAC Address (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) MAC Address (Network, Information menu) 104 MAC Address Filter (Network, Setup menu) 98 Main Zone Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 99 Manual Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) 91 Manual speaker configuration 91 Manual station preset (FM/AM radio) 54 Max Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 95 Max Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 100 Measurement result (YPAO) 41 Media sharing setup 65 Memory Guard (Function, Setup menu) 102 Menu language selection 36 Menu operation key (remote control) 13 MHL cable 22 MHL connection 32 MHL jack 22 MHL Overloaded (error indication) 121 MHL-compatible mobile device 32 MODE key 13 MON.CHK (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 106 Monaural Mix (Sound Program menu) 87 Monaural reception (FM radio) 53 Monitor check 106 Mono Movie (sound program) 49 49 98 NAS (Network Attached Storage) 33 NAS connection 33 NAS content playback 65 Network (Information menu) 104 Network (Setup menu) 98 Network Attached Storage (NAS) 33 Network cable 33 Network connection 33 Network information 104 Network Name (Network, Information menu) 104 Network Name (Network, Setup menu) 99 Network Standby (Network, Setup menu) 98 No content (error indication) 121 No device (error indication) 121 No F.PRNS SP (YPAO error message) 43 No Front SP (YPAO error message) 43 No MIC (YPAO error message) 43 No Signal (YPAO error message) 43 No Sur. SP (YPAO error message) 43 Noisy (YPAO error message) 43 Normal (Wiring, YPAO measurement result) 42 NTSC (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 106 Numeric key (remote control) 13 O ON SCREEN key 13 OPTICAL jack 22 OPTION key 13 Option menu 78 Out of Phase (YPAO warning message) 44 Output (Audio Signal, Information menu) 104 Over Distance (YPAO warning message) 44 P PAL (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 106 Panorama (Sound Program menu) 87 Parametric EQ (Speaker, Setup menu) 93 PARTY key 13 Party mode 76 Party Mode Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 100 PC connection 33 PC content playback 65 PHONES jack 8, 9 PHONO jack 11 Playback device connection 28 Playback device operation (remote control) 109 Please wait (error indication) 121 Power Amp Assign (Speaker, Setup menu) 91 Power cable connection 35 Power management 102 Power Mode (DC OUT, Setup menu) 101 PRE OUT jack 11 Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) 54 Program Service (Radio Data System) 55 Program Type (Radio Data System) 55 Pure Direct 52 PURE DIRECT (sound mode) 52 Q Q factor 93 R Radio Data System (FM radio) 55 Radio Data System information 55 Radio Data System tuning 55 Radio Text (Radio Data System) 55 Rear panel (part names and functions) 11, 12 Recording device connection 34 RemID Mismatch (error indication) 121 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 136 Remote connection 74 Remote control (part names and functions) 13 Remote control code registration (playback device) 109 Remote control code registration (TV) 108 Remote Control Code Search 108, 109 Remote control ID setting 105 Remote control ID setting (remote control) 105 Remote control sensor 8, 9 Remote control signal transmitter (remote control) REMOTE ID (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 105 Remote ID (System, Information menu) 104 REMOTE IN jack 11, 12 REMOTE OUT jack 11, 12 Rename (input name) 82 Rename (network name) 99 Rename (scene name) 85 Rename/Icon Select (Input menu) 82 Rename/Icon Select (Scene menu) 85 Repeat (iPod, Option menu) 61 Repeat (PC/NAS, Option menu) 67 Repeat (USB storage device, Option menu) 64 Reset (remote control) 112 Reset (Scene menu) 85 Resolution (Video Mode, Setup menu) 95 Reverb Delay (Sound Program menu) 87 Reverb Level (Sound Program menu) 87 Reverb Time (Sound Program menu) 87 Reverse (Wiring, YPAO measurement result) 42 Roleplaying Game (sound program) 49 Room Size (Sound Program menu) 86 Router connection 33 S Sampling (Audio Signal, Information menu) Save (Scene menu) 84 SBR → SBL (YPAO error message) 43 Scene configuration 46 SCENE function 46 SCENE link playback 46 104 13 Scene menu 83 Sci-Fi (sound program) 49 Setup menu 88 Short Message (Display Set, Setup menu) 100 Shuffle (iPod, Option menu) 61 Shuffle (PC/NAS. Option menu) 67 Shuffle (USB storage device, Option menu) 64 Signal information 104 SILENT CINEMA 48 Simple play (iPod) 60 Single measurement (YPAO) 39 Size (YPAO measurement result) 42 SLEEP key 13 Sleep timer 13 Sleep timer (Zone2) 75 Sound (Setup menu) 94 Sound field effect 48 Sound mode selection 47 Sound program 49, 50 Sound Program menu 85 SP IMP. (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 105 Speaker (Setup menu) 91 Speaker cable connection 20 Speaker connection 19 Speaker impedance 15 Speaker Impedance (System, Information menu) Speaker impedance setting 18, 105 Speaker indicator (front display) 10 Speaker placement 15 Spectacle (sound program) 49 Sports (sound program) 49 Standard (sound program) 49 Standby indicator (front panel) 8, 9 Standby Sync (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 97 Standby Through (HDMI, Setup menu) 97 Station preset (FM/AM radio) 54 Status (Network, Information menu) 104 STEREO (sound program subcategory) 50 Stereo pin cable (RCA cable) 22 Stereo reception (FM radio) 53 STP network cable 33 STRAIGHT (sound mode) 51 Straight decode 51 Subnet Mask (IP Address, Setup menu) 98 Subnet Mask (Network, Information menu) 104 Subwoofer (Speaker, Setup menu) 92 Subwoofer connection 21 Subwoofer Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 80 SUR.DECODE (sound mode) 51 Surround (Speaker, Setup menu) 91 Surround Back (Speaker, Setup menu) 92 Surround Back Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 86 Surround Back Liveness (Sound Program menu) 86 Surround Back Room Size (Sound Program menu) 86 Surround decoder 51 Surround Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 86 Surround Liveness (Sound Program menu) 86 Surround Room Size (Sound Program menu) 86 SW.Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 80 System (Information menu) 104 System ID (System, Information menu) 104 T 104 Target Zone (Trigger Output, Setup menu) 101 Test Tone (Speaker, Setup menu) 94 The Bottom Line (sound program) 50 The Roxy Theatre (sound program) 50 Tone Control (Option menu) 79 TONE CONTROL key 8, 9 TP (Traffic Program) 55 Traffic information (Radio Data System) 55 Traffic Program (FM radio, Option menu) 55 Treble (Tone Control, Option menu) 79 Trigger function 35 Trigger Mode (Trigger Output, Setup menu) 101 TRIGGER OUT jack 11, 12 Trigger Output (Function, Setup menu) 101 TU (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 106 Tuner Freq. Step (System, Information menu) 104 Turntable connection 31 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 137 TV Audio Input (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 96 TV connection 23 TV connection (ARC-compatible TV) 23 TV connection (HDMI Control-compatible TV) 25 TV connection (TV with HDMI input jacks) 26 TV connection (TV without HDMI input jacks) 27 TV FORMAT (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 106 TV Format (System, Information menu) 104 TV operation (remote control) 108 TV operation key (remote control) 13 U Unable to play (error indication) 121 UPDATE (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 107 USB jack 8, 9 USB mass storage class device 62 USB Overloaded (error indication) 121 USB storage device connection 62 USB storage device content playback 62 User Cancel (YPAO error message) 43 V Volume Trim (Option menu) 80 VPS (Virtual Presence Speaker) 7 W Wallpaper (Display Set, Setup menu) 101 Wiring (YPAO measurement result) 42 Y Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) 37 YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer YPAO error message 43 YPAO MIC jack 8, 9 YPAO microphone 37 YPAO warning message 44 37 Z Zone Rename (Main Zone Set, Setup menu) 99 Zone Rename (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 100 Zone2 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 100 Zone2 speaker connection 73 VERSION (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 107 Version error (error indication) 121 Video (Setup menu) 95 VIDEO AUX jack 8, 9 Video device connection 28 VIDEO jack 22 Video Mode (Option menu) 80 Video Mode (Video, Setup menu) 95 Video Out (Input menu) 83 Video pin cable 22 Video Signal (Information menu) 104 Video signal flow 126 Video signal type setting 106 Video/audio input jack combination 29 Virtual CINEMA DSP 48 Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) 7 Voltage Selection 35 VOLTAGE SELECTOR 11, 12 Volume Interlock (Input menu) 83 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 138 © 2013 Yamaha Corporation YF236A0/EN-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
-
105
-
106
-
107
-
108
-
109
-
110
-
111
-
112
-
113
-
114
-
115
-
116
-
117
-
118
-
119
-
120
-
121
-
122
-
123
-
124
-
125
-
126
-
127
-
128
-
129
-
130
-
131
-
132
-
133
-
134
-
135
-
136
-
137
-
138
-
139
Yamaha RX-V675 El manual del propietario
- Categoría
- Receptores AV
- Tipo
- El manual del propietario
- Este manual también es adecuado para
En otros idiomas
- français: Yamaha RX-V675 Le manuel du propriétaire
- italiano: Yamaha RX-V675 Manuale del proprietario
- English: Yamaha RX-V675 Owner's manual
- Deutsch: Yamaha RX-V675 Bedienungsanleitung
- русский: Yamaha RX-V675 Инструкция по применению
- Nederlands: Yamaha RX-V675 de handleiding
- português: Yamaha RX-V675 Manual do proprietário
- dansk: Yamaha RX-V675 Brugervejledning
- svenska: Yamaha RX-V675 Bruksanvisning
- suomi: Yamaha RX-V675 Omistajan opas
Documentos relacionados
-
Yamaha RX-A1040 El manual del propietario
-
Yamaha RX-V373 El manual del propietario
-
Yamaha HTR-3065 El manual del propietario
-
Yamaha RX-V375 El manual del propietario
-
Yamaha HTR-3066 El manual del propietario
-
Yamaha HTR-2866 El manual del propietario
-
Yamaha R-N301 El manual del propietario
-
Yamaha HTR-5063 Guia de referencia
-
Yamaha RX-V567 El manual del propietario
-
Yamaha RX-V773 El manual del propietario